JP2019136176A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 can set a jackpot probability in which a jackpot lottery results in a jackpot from among a plurality of mutually different jackpot probabilities, and can display the set jackpot probability (game setting value) on a 7-segment display part 39. Display contents regarding a jackpot probability on the 7-segment display part 39 are controlled according to the number of game balls (the number of special out balls) entering a special out ball port 373 from beginning of a jackpot game to initial winning or an opening/closing execution mode to completion of the opening/closing execution mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 39

Description

  The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines have a plurality of game setting values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery.

JP 2000-024234 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of interest and interest in the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest and interest in games and improve the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that give a player a game value,
The start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The perspective view which shows an example of the opening / closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening-and-closing door provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, a cron device, and a game ball retention part. The perspective view of a croon device. Sectional drawing which follows the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. The figure for demonstrating the predetermined period when a game ball is made to stay in a game ball retention part. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10B and 10C are cross-sectional views taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. FIG. 11A is a view showing an example of a 7-segment display section provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11B is a view showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and display examples of the 7-segment display section. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of a main controller. The figure which shows typically an example of the performance information display apparatus of a main controller. The figure which shows the example of a display in the performance display monitor of a performance information display apparatus. The figure which shows the example of a display in the game setting value display part of a performance information display apparatus. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the 1st pending | holding command setting process performed by the start winning process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variable game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the variable game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the change start process performed by the change game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of a first stop symbol selection table and a variation type table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 35. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 35. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process performed by the command determination process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 7 segment display part control processing performed by the game setting value display processing of FIG. FIG. 40A is a diagram showing the correspondence between the lighting state or extinguishing state of each segment in the 7-segment display unit and the display numerical value, and FIGS. 40B and 40C are the 7-segment display unit control of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the control order pattern classification selection table used by a process. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the command determination process performed with the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 7 segment display part control processing performed by game setting value display processing. FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between alphabets displayed on the 7-segment display unit of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention and game setting values, and FIG. 45 (B) is the 7-segment display unit. The figure which shows the correspondence of the lighting or light extinction state of each segment, and a display alphabet. The figure which shows an example of the control order pattern classification selection table used by the 7-segment display part control processing of FIG. FIG. 47A is a diagram showing an example of an ending screen in the jackpot game in the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 47B is a game setting value display face image display order (number of special out balls). FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a correspondence relationship between a display part and a display part. The figure which shows the correspondence of a game setting value and a game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a game setting value display face image. The figure which shows an example of the display pattern of a game setting value display face image. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of face image display processing executed in the game setting value display processing of FIG. 53. FIG. 55A is a diagram showing an ending screen in a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55B is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and game setting value images. FIG. 56 (A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and setting images. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in the jackpot game in the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57 (B) is the image erasing order (step (the number of special out balls and erased images). The figure which shows an example of correspondence)). The figure which shows an example of the deletion pattern of a game setting value image. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process performed by the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game setting value image display process in the game setting value display process of FIG. The figure which shows the correspondence of the expected ball appearance value and the ball expected value face image in the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the sub timer interruption process performed with an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for expected output value display processing executed in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. 62. FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of face image display processing in expected appearance value display processing of FIG. 62. FIG.

  Hereinafter, the first to sixth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for the understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, and an electrical decoration unit 27.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). This operation button 20 is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by a player in a predetermined specific period in a variable game effect executed in a variable game that clearly indicates the lottery result in the big hit lottery to the player. It is operated to execute an operation button effect.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the variable game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11 and execute a sound output effect that outputs sound. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the illumination part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs lamp production | presentation by the blinking aspects, such as lighting color and lighting or light extinction.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a first winning port 314, a second winning port 315, a variable winning port 316, a through gate 317, and an out port 318. , A variable display unit 34, a cruising device 37, a game ball retaining portion 38, and a 7-segment display portion 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, or the variable winning port 316 are discharged from the out port 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeder 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the out port 318 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. In addition, on the back side of the game board 31, game balls can be detected individually corresponding to the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316. Entrance sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, and 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. In addition, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the out port 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31 to be described later. (See FIG. 12). In addition, the variable winning opening 316 is provided at the right center portion of the game board 31, and a game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 can enter. The game ball that has passed through the opening 35 of the variable winning opening 316 is guided to the cruising device 37 by a guidance path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entrance sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) that can individually detect the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that a game ball launched into the right area of the game board 31 may pass through the through gate 317, and the second prize opening is triggered by the passage of the game ball at the through gate 317 being detected. A lottery is performed per usual figure for determining whether or not to open 315.

  The entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the entrance sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the special out The detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, detection of a game ball by the ball sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. The main control unit 331 (MPU 41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 35. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launch mechanism 32.

  Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU 41) confirms that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered a special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 described later. The special out-ball detection command shown is set, and this special out-ball detection command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, in the audio lamp control device 5, the number of special out balls is counted.

  The incoming sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors. Any arbitrary sensor may be used.

  In addition, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to enter the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by opening the electric accessory 315 b, and the game ball can enter the second prize opening 315 by closing the electric accessory 315 b. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not the game ball is restricted to be entered into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 319 is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the game board 31, the opening of the opening / closing door 319 makes it possible to enter a game ball into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening / closing door 319 restricts the entry of the gaming ball into the variable winning opening 316. The Note that the open / close door 319 is moved to a position where the variable prize opening 316 is opened in a round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and otherwise, the open / close door 319 stands by at a position where the variable prize opening 316 is closed. Thereby, the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 in the round game in the jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening / closing door 319 includes a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment portions 319d for rotatably attaching the opening / closing door 319 to the game board 31, and protrudes slightly above the horizontal from the game board 31 when the opening / closing door 319 is in the operating position. . As a result, the open / close door 319 can receive a game ball 99 released from a first passage 374 and a second passage 375 of the sorting device 37 to be described later when in the operating position. The pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a, and prevent the game balls 99 received by the base 319a from spilling from the left and right of the base 319a. In addition, the pair of guides 319c guide the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extends from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, and forms a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. The variable winning opening 316 has a through portion 316 b that discharges the game ball 99 received by the open / close door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. The through portion 316 b communicates with a guide path 316 c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 enters the variable winning opening 316 and is guided to the cruising device 37 through the penetration portion 316b and the guide path 316c. In addition, the above-mentioned entrance sensor 316a is provided in the guidance path 316c. As a result, the game ball 99 that has entered the variable winning opening 316 is detected when it passes through the penetration portion 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c.

  In the gaming machine 10, a big hit lottery is performed by the main control unit 331 when the entrance of a game ball into the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 is detected by the incoming sensor 314 a or the incoming sensor 315 a. And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  In addition, in the gaming machine 10, when the ball entering the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, and the variable winning port 316 is detected by the ball sensors 313 a to 316 a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  In addition, when a game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. When the lottery result is a win, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state) and 16R probability jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot gaming state, five round games (unit games) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a maximum number of game balls (for example, 9) or more are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variable jackpot gaming state is a gaming state including an open / close execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than the 5R jackpot gaming state, and more than the 5R jackpot gaming state. This is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the symbol change display and the variable game according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 entered. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display means of the present invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by, for example, sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. In addition, sub-designs, such as another character or a design, may be displayed between main symbols. In this embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine main symbol types “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols vary along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stop state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the big hit lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”, the state where the main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an active line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that it is a jackpot Is done. The jackpot type may be clearly indicated by a combination of main symbols on the active line, but is not necessarily clearly indicated. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination set as a symbol combination indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among the main symbols, for example, “777” symbol combination arranged in an active line Is displayed, or a combination of the same symbols other than “777” is displayed on the active line. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, a state in which symbol combinations such as “333”, which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating the 5R probability variation jackpot in the main symbol, are arranged in an active line is displayed. Alternatively, a state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpots or 5R probability variation jackpots such as “777” and “333” are arranged on the active line. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than a combination of symbols indicating a probable jackpot such as “222” or “444”, which is set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the main symbols. A state in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged on an active line is displayed. When the lottery result is “out”, a state in which different combinations of main symbols are arranged on an active line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable game effect indicating a degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a big hit, along with the change display of the main symbol in the variable game. In addition, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, if a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing 16R probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R probability variation jackpot is given as a variable game effect. Or the suggestion effect which suggests that it is 5R normal jackpot is performed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variable jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, when a combination of jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination showing the probability variation jackpot is displayed on the active line, 5R normal jackpot is given as a variable game effect. The suggestion effect that suggests that is. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variable jackpot is executed.

  Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state.

  A sub-image display unit 38 such as a liquid crystal display is provided in the left region on the front side of the symbol display unit 341. In the sub-image display unit 38, a game effect is executed together with the symbol display unit 341 in a variable game or a jackpot game. In addition, the sub-image display unit 38 executes an effect that suggests to the player information (performance information) related to the performance of playing in a variable game or a jackpot game. Although details of the performance information will be described later, this performance information includes, for example, a game set value, lottery count information for unit big hits, base information, continuous character ratio information, and character ratio information. The sub image display unit 38 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

  It is also conceivable that the game board 31 is provided with a magnet sensor or a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 is performed illegally using a magnet, it is possible to detect the fraud. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning port 314 and the second winning port 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the incoming ball sensors 314a and 315a and erroneously detecting the incoming ball of the game ball is performed, the illegal act can be detected. Note that the radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of 50 MHz to 3 GHz, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the cruising device 37 places the game ball entered in the variable prize opening 316 into one of a normal out ball mouth 378 and a special out ball mouth 373 described later (see FIGS. 7 and 8). It is something to distribute. Here, FIG. 6 is a view showing an example of the opening / closing door 319, the cron device 37, and the game ball staying portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the cron device 37, and FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the X1-X1 cutting line.

  As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the croon device 37 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 has a circular shape in plan view, and includes a high-level bottom 371a, a low-level bottom 371b, and a slanting portion 371c that is provided between the high-level bottom 371a and the low-level bottom 371b.

  The high-order bottom portion 371a constitutes the right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downwardly to the right. A special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball outlet 373 (special discharge port) is provided in the high-order bottom portion 371a. The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extending in the up-down direction D2 at the center of the high-order bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. A first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end portion of the special out ball passage 374. The first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retaining portion 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375 a and a lower opening 375 b connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and discharges the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 from the right side toward the game ball retention portion 38 from the special out ball passage 374. On the other hand, the game ball retention part 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as will be described later. That is, the first guide member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right part (upstream side) of the stay lane 381 in the game ball stay part 38. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball opening 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball 373 is not expected to enter the various winning holes 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it passes the special out ball 373, or When it is introduced into the out ball passage 374, it is handled as an out ball.

  The low-order bottom part 371b constitutes a left part of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined so as to become low-level toward the center. A normal passage 376 having a normal out mouth 378 is provided in the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is provided at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the lower bottom portion 371b. This normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 entered through the normal out ball outlet 378 to the back side of the game board 31 and has a semi-cylindrical shape having an opening area larger than that of the special out ball outlet 373. Is formed. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31 in the same manner as the game balls passed through the opening of the out port 318. The game balls 99 collected by the second guide member 377 are detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

  As described above, the game ball 99 that has been launched into the right region of the game board 31 and received by the opening / closing door 319 is guided to the clown device 37 by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided to the croon device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the croon device 37. And most of the game balls 99 that move on the bottom wall 371 are usually out of contact due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy, or collision with the peripheral wall 372 of the cruise device 37 or other game balls 99. Enter 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball outlet 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

  On the other hand, a part of the game ball moving on the bottom wall 371, for example, about 0.5% to 1% (1 to 2 in a 16R round game (about 1 per 10R round game)) The movement direction is changed due to a collision with the peripheral edge of the out ball outlet 378 or other game balls, or the like, and the ball enters the special out ball mouth 373. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 is discharged toward the game ball retaining portion 38 through the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

  In the present embodiment, the special out ball 373 is provided on the high-level bottom 371 a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball 373. The game ball 99 is remarkably difficult to enter compared to the normal out ball opening 378, but instead of or in addition to all or a part of these, the special out ball opening 373 is used for the game ball. It is also possible that 99 is difficult to enter. For example, it is conceivable to provide an inhibiting means for inhibiting the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball outlet 373 around the special out ball mouth 373. As the blocking means, for example, an obstacle that prevents the ball from entering the special out ball outlet 373 such as a wall surrounding the special out ball mouth 373, a magnetic force or electromagnetic force repelling the game ball 99 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 373 A means for generating a force and a means for forming an air curtain by jetting air in the peripheral portion of the special out ball outlet 373 can be considered.

  In addition, an opening / closing part that opens and closes the special out ball opening 373 may be provided so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball opening 373. In this case, the special out lens 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out lens 378, and the normal out lens 378 is formed to have the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out lens 373. Also good.

  Further, means for distributing the game balls 99 that have entered the variable winning opening 316 to the normal out ball outlet 378 and the special out ball outlet 373 are not limited to the clown device 37, and may be other means. For example, by adjusting the position of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail placed on the game board 31, the normal out hole 378 and the special out hole 373 may be distributed. .

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retaining unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 and retains the game ball 99 until a predetermined period elapses. It is. Here, FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a predetermined period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention unit 38.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the present embodiment, the predetermined period is opened and closed in the normal jackpot game after the start of the jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot This is until the execution mode ends (ending starts). For example, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is (5R) normal jackpot, opening and closing is executed from the start of the normal jackpot game (opening) during the predetermined period. Until the mode ends (ending starts). That is, when the initial hit is a normal jackpot, a predetermined period is set in the normal jackpot game. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot (first win) in the low probability mode is a probabilistic jackpot, the predetermined period has a high probability from the start of the probabilistic jackpot game (opening) with respect to the first hit. This is until the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the mode is ended (ending is started). In other words, when the first hit is a probable big hit, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first big hit game to the normal big hit game with respect to the normal big hit in the high probability mode. For a predetermined period of time (excluding retraction).

  By the way, a game setting value is displayed on a 7-segment display unit 39 described later. In this 7-segment display unit 39, the number of segments A to G corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 (the number satisfying a specific condition) is turned on or off. It becomes the control object. Here, the game ball 99 can enter the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 in the big hit game, but the game ball 99 is difficult to enter the special out ball mouth 373. For example, it is about 0.5% to 1% of the game balls 99 guided to the clown device 37 (1 to 2 in a 16R round game (about 1 for 10R of round game)). Therefore, if the period during which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention unit 38 is limited to the execution period of one big hit game machine, the number of segments A to G to be controlled in the 7-segment display unit 39 is small. It becomes difficult not only to grasp the game setting value but also to estimate the game setting value.

  On the other hand, by setting a predetermined period for retaining the game ball in the game ball retaining unit 38 from the initial hit to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, if the initial hit is a probable big hit, From the start of the game, a predetermined period is set over the normal jackpot game with respect to the normal jackpot game in the high probability mode, and the predetermined period continues during the jackpot game (excluding withdrawal in the short-time mode). As a result, it is expected that more game balls 99 will enter the special out ball outlet 373 of the clune device 37 and stay in the game ball staying portion 38 by continuously winning the winning odds. Therefore, it is expected that the number of segments to be controlled to be turned on or off on the 7-segment display unit 39 increases as the probability variation jackpot continues. Therefore, the possibility that the game setting value can be confirmed, or the game setting value is further increased. There is a high possibility of being able to guess accurately. As a result, the player not only enjoys the game with the expectation that the probabilistic jackpots will continue from the outstanding aspect, but also expects the probable jackpots to continue for estimation or grasping of the game setting value. You can enjoy the game.

  Also, when the jackpot game is started, the game is terminated in the middle of the jackpot game unless there is a special circumstance, and the game is not terminated during the high probability mode in the high probability mode. Therefore, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. Thus, even when a player who does not know the timing at which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized (the end of the predetermined period) advances the game, the game is played immediately before the game setting value can be estimated or recognized. Termination is prevented. Therefore, even for a player who cannot know the timing at which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized, the game setting value can be estimated or recognized. In addition, a so-called hyena action of another player who plays a game aiming at a timing at which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized can be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, 5R probability variation jackpots and 16R probability variation jackpots having different numbers of rounds are set as probability variation jackpots. In this way, when multiple probability variation jackpots with different numbers of rounds (expected value of expected balls) are set, the player expects that probability variation jackpots with a large number of rounds (expected value of expected balls) will continue, and the number of rounds The degree of discouragement is large when it is a probabilistic jackpot with a small (expected value) On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it can be expected that a game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 373 even if the probability variation big hit with a small number of rounds (expected value for the ball) is entered, Degree of disappointment when the probability is a big hit with a small number of rounds (expected value for playing) by improving the possibility that the game setting value can be estimated or grasped by continuing the predetermined period for retaining the game ball Can be reduced.

  The start of the predetermined period may be a time when the initial opening / closing execution mode starts (the initial opening ends). On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period may be a time when the jackpot game with respect to the normal jackpot ends (ending the ending with the jackpot), or a time when the time-saving mode to which the normal jackpot transition is made ends. Further, in this embodiment, the description has been made on the assumption of a loop probability changing machine, but in other forms of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, one-kind two-mixers, the predetermined period according to the mode. It is also possible to set For example, in the case of a V-ST machine, when there is no V prize in the first win (usually big win), the predetermined period is set in the same manner as in the case of the normal jackpot of the loop probability change machine, and when there is a V prize in the first win (probable big win) ), The start of the first jackpot game or the opening / closing execution mode is the beginning of the predetermined period, the end time of the opening / closing execution mode with a jackpot without V winnings, or the end of the specified number of jackpot lotteries in the high probability mode, etc. It can be considered as the end of the predetermined period.

  It is also conceivable to set the predetermined period regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of a specific condition, staying in the short-time mode during the period of staying in the normal gaming state (period from the end of the time-saving mode until the next jackpot starts) Period (normally from the end of jackpot to transition to normal gaming state), stay in low probability mode (period from the end of normal jackpot until the next jackpot game starts), high probability A period until a predetermined number of lottery lotteries are received in one or both of the mode and the low probability mode, a period until a predetermined number of lotteries are drawn per one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a high probability mode, and In one or both of the low probability modes, the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning opening 313, the high probability mode and the low probability mode The predetermined number of game balls 99 are won at the second winning port 315 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode during the period until the predetermined number of game balls 99 are won at the first winning port 314 in one or both. A period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, a predetermined number of one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. For example, a period until the game ball 99 is launched on the game board 31. Also, the start of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned on depending on the type of specific condition. Also, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply to the gaming machine 10 is turned off depending on the type of specific condition.

  In addition, when the specific condition is set regardless of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot game, or regardless of the transition of the game state, a game ball is not inserted into the special out ball outlet 373. It is set as a condition. For example, the specific condition may be that the game ball 99 passes through a specific area other than the special out ball outlet 373 in the game area set in the game board 31. Specifically, the specific condition is that a specific number of game balls 99 are won in the general winning port 313, a specific number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning port 314, and the second winning port 315. A specific number of game balls 99 may be won, or a specific number of game balls 99 may pass through the through gate 317.

  Other examples of specific conditions include obtaining a specific number of game balls (out) in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode, and in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Examples include acquiring a specific number of difference balls (including a negative difference ball), generating a reserved jackpot game, playing a specific effect in a variable game or a jackpot game, and the like.

  Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X2-X2 in FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when a stopper 383 described later is at the upper limit position. FIG. 10C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line X3-X3 in FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is at the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retaining portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG. 10.

  As shown in FIGS. 6, 8, and 10, the game ball retaining portion 38 includes a retaining lane 381, a discharge lane 382, and a stopper portion 383.

  The stay lane 381 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The stay lane 381 is open at the top and slopes downward to the left. The stay lane 381 has a depth dimension smaller than the diameter of the game sphere, and at least a part of the game sphere 99 retained in the stay lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). Thereby, the number of game balls 99 staying in the stay lane 381, that is, the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 within a predetermined period can be grasped. In addition, the stay lane 381 is preferably formed transparent with resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381. Note that the number of game balls 99 retained in the stay lane 381 may be displayed instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 retained in the stay lane 381 visible. The number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381 can be displayed by, for example, the number of lamps turned on or image display on the symbol display unit 341.

  The discharge lane 382 continues to the left end portion of the stay lane 381, and guides the game ball 99 stayed in the stay lane 381 to a position that can be detected by a predetermined portion, for example, the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

  The discharge lane 382 is provided with a special out ball sensor 384. The special out ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the stay lane 381 moves in the discharge lane 382. That is, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 retained in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 within a predetermined period. Used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out ball sensor 384, so that the MPU 41 It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved through the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs the special out ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later. In the processing, it is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls, and based on the number of special out balls and the game setting value, Control display content.

  As the special out ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out ball sensor 384 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 5. In this case, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 does not set a special out ball detection command, but the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls based on the output from the special out ball sensor 384.

  The stopper portion 383 is provided between the stay lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. . The upper limit position is a position at which the tip protrudes upward, and the stopper 383 is in the upper limit position, so that the game ball 99 can stay in the stay lane 381 (see FIG. 10B). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip does not protrude upward, and the stopper 383 is in the lower limit position so that the game ball 99 of the stay lane 381 can be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (FIG. 10 (A)). The game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 35 (see FIG. 12).

  The means for allowing the game ball 99 to stay in the stay lane 381 and for allowing the game ball 99 in the stay lane 381 to be discharged to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the vertically movable stopper portion 383, for example, a stopper that can move back and forth. Other means such as a stopper portion that can be rotated between the standing portion and the prone state are also possible. Further, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of magnetic force or electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by releasing the action of magnetic force or electromagnetic force. . Further, by making the stay lane 381 vertically movable, it is possible to realize a state where the game ball 99 is stayed and a state where it is discharged. For example, the game ball 99 is retained by waiting the stay lane 381 at a position lower than the discharge lane 382, while the game ball 99 is moved to a position higher than the discharge lane 382 by moving the stay lane 381 to the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening through which the game ball 99 can be discharged on the back side of the game board 31, and the game ball 99 can be placed in the stay lane 381 from the position where the game ball 99 can stay. The stay lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down with respect to a position where it can be discharged to the rear side of the lane. Also, instead of the stay lane 381, by moving a box-like movable body, the game ball 99 can be retained in the movable body, and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

  Here, FIG. 11 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided in the game board shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display unit 39 includes seven segments A to G and dot points DP. Each segment A to G and dot point DP can be turned on and off individually. The 7-segment display unit 39 lights up the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 of the main control device 4 with the number of segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball outlet 373 of the clune device 37. It becomes the control target of turning off. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the game setting values are displayed up to the stage according to the number of game balls 99 that enter the special out ball outlet 373. And in the 7 segment display part 39, since the number can be displayed by the seven segments A to G, the number of the game balls 99 that enter the special out ball outlet 373 of the clune device 37 is 7 or more. In this case, a number indicating the game setting value is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11B, when the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 is 7 or more, or when the game setting value is 1. When the segments B and C are lit, the number 1 is displayed. When the game setting value is 2, the segments A, B, D, E, and G are lit and the number 2 is displayed. When the value is 3, the segments A to D and G are turned on to display the number 3, and when the game setting value is 4, the segments B, C, F, and G are turned on to display the number 4 When the game setting value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F, and G are turned on to display the number 5, and when the game setting value is 6, the segments A, C to G are displayed. The number 6 is displayed by being lit.

  If the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) that enter the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 exceeds seven, the lighting state of the seven-segment display unit 39 is set to seven special out balls. However, for more than seven pieces, for example, changing the color of the segment being lit or lighting it in a predetermined pattern, performance information related to the play performance other than the game set value is displayed. It may be suggested or indicated. In this case, when the number of special out balls exceeds 7, not only the game setting value can be recognized but also other performance information can be estimated or recognized. As a result, when more than seven game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball outlet 373, not only the seven game balls 99 are wasted, but not only the game setting value but also other game balls It is possible to provide a gameability capable of estimating or recognizing performance information.

  Here, the segment A can be turned on when the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, when segment A is lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2, 3, 5, and 6. When segment A is controlled and not lit, the game setting value is 1 and 4 (see FIG. 40A). That is, when the segment A is turned on, the game setting value 1 that is the most unfavorable to the player is denied, and the possibility that the game setting values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player remains. On the other hand, if segment A is a control target and is not lit, there is a possibility that the game setting value 1 is the most unfavorable for the player. Therefore, when the segment A is turned on, the game setting value 1 is denied, and the possibility of the game setting values 5 and 6 remains. Therefore, the possibility that the game setting value is advantageous to the player is relatively high. Get higher.

  The segment B can be turned on when the game setting value is 1, 2, 3 or 4. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 2, 3, and 4 when the segment B is lit, and the game setting value is 5 and when the segment B is not lit as a control target. 6 (see FIG. 40A). That is, when the segment B is not lit, it is determined that the game setting value 5 or 6 is advantageous to the player for the player. Therefore, whether or not the segment B is lit is an extremely important factor in determining whether or not the game setting value is advantageous for the player.

  The segment C can be turned on when the game set value is 1, 3, 4, 5 or 6. Therefore, when the segment C is lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6. When the segment C is not lit as a control target, the game setting value is 2 (see FIG. 40A). That is, when the segment C is lit, the game setting value 2 that is relatively unfavorable for the player is denied, but the game setting values 5 and 6 may be advantageous for the player. The possibility of the game setting value 1 is also left at the same time. For this reason, it is difficult to determine whether or not the segment C is lit alone, which is an advantageous game setting value for the player. In this sense, the importance of the segment C is low. This is important in making a judgment in combination with the fact whether or not the other segment is turned on when another segment is controlled. For example, when the segment E is lit as the other segment, it can be determined that it is one of the game setting values 2 and 6 as described later. Therefore, when the segment C is lit and the segment E is lit, it is determined that the game setting value 6 is most advantageous for the player. On the other hand, when the segment C is controlled but does not light up and the segment E lights up, it is determined that the game setting value 2 is relatively unfavorable for the player.

  The segment D can be turned on when the game setting value is 2, 3, 5 or 6. Therefore, when the segment D is lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2, 3, 5 and 6. When the segment D is not lit as a control target, the game setting value is 1 and 4 (see FIG. 40A). That is, when the segment D is turned on, similarly to the segment A, the game setting value 1 that is most unfavorable to the player is denied, and the possibility that the game setting values 5 and 6 are advantageous to the player increases. Therefore, it can be determined that the fact that the segment D is lit is likely to be in an advantageous state for the player, and conversely, if the segment D is not lit as a control target, the player will be lit. It can be judged that there is a high possibility that the situation is disadvantageous.

  The segment E can be turned on when the game setting value is 2 or 6. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is either 2 or 6 when the segment E is lit, and the game setting value is 1, 3, 4 and when the segment E is not lit as a control target. 5 (see FIG. 40A). That is, when the segment E is turned on, the possibility of the game setting value 6 remains, so that the game setting value 6 is affirmed and the game setting value 2 is negated by another segment simultaneously with the segment E. It can be determined whether or not the game setting value 6 is most advantageous for the player. For example, when the segment B is not turned on as a control target, the segment C is turned on, and the segment F is turned on, the game setting value 6 is affirmed and the game setting value 2 is denied. Therefore, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the segment E is turned on, so that the game setting value 6 is determined.

  The segment F can be turned on when the game setting value is 4, 5, or 6. Therefore, when the segment F is lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 4, 5 and 6. When the segment F is not lit as a control target, the game setting value is 1, 2 and 3 (see FIG. 40A). That is, when the segment F is lit, it can be determined that the top three game setting values 4, 5 or 6 are advantageous to the player. On the contrary, when the segment F is not controlled and is turned on, it can be determined that the lower three game setting values 1, 2 or 3 are disadvantageous for the player. Therefore, the level of the game setting value can be determined based on whether or not the segment F is turned on as a control target, so that the player can determine whether or not to continue the game on the gaming machine 10 that is currently playing a game. It becomes easy to judge.

  The segment G can be turned on when the game set values are 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. Therefore, when the segment G is lit, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. When the segment G is not lit as a control target, the game setting value is 1 (see FIG. 40A). That is, whether or not the game setting value 1 is the most unfavorable for the player can be determined by whether or not the segment G is turned on as a control target. Therefore, since the game setting value 1 is determined when the segment G is not turned on as a control target, the player is given an opportunity to end the game in the gaming machine 10 that is currently playing the game. It is done.

  As described above, the segments A to G are not the same in importance in estimating the game setting value, but are different in importance. For example, segments A to G are different in the ease of guessing the game setting value itself, the ease of judging the level of the game setting value alone, and the game setting value by combining with other segments And the ease of guessing the height is different. Therefore, the ease of guessing the game setting value differs depending on the order in which the segments are to be controlled. In the present embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in an order according to a pattern selected from a plurality of control order patterns predetermined for each game setting value (see FIG. 40B). As will be described later, the control order pattern includes those in which the segments A to G are controlled in the order in which the game setting values are difficult to guess.

  The segments A to G to be controlled may be determined by lottery regardless of the control order pattern. In this case, when there are a plurality of game balls 99 entering the special out ball outlet 373, the number of lotteries is determined according to the number of game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373. The segments A to G determined by the above are sequentially controlled. In addition, when the segments A to G to be controlled are determined by lottery, the selection rate of the segments A to G may be uniform, but the selection rate of at least one segment is different from the selection rate of other segments. Also good. For example, it is conceivable to increase the selection rate of a segment for which it is difficult to estimate a game setting value, while decreasing the selection rate of a segment for which a game setting value is easy to estimate. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game setting value from being easily estimated when the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied is small.

  Further, whether or not each of the segments A to G is a control target in the 7-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, it is easier to guess the game setting value than when it is not explicitly indicated. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, it is not clearly indicated that each segment A to G is a control target, and a technique in which it is difficult to estimate a game setting value is employed. In addition, when clearly indicating to the player that each segment A to G is a control target, for example, by lighting the control target segment, the player is clearly informed that the segment is a control target, and the control target It may be possible to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is to be controlled by lighting the segment with a color different from that for lighting the segment.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

  The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. In addition, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general winning port 313, the first winning port 314, the second winning port 315, the variable winning port 316, and the through gate 317 have entered based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. Judging. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 35. Furthermore, an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like are connected to the input / output I / F 42.

  Then, the MPU 41 sends a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a jackpot game end command, a special out ball to the voice lamp control device 5 Commands such as detection commands and game setting value change commands are output.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The change pattern command is set in step S1605 in the change start process of FIG. 26 described later, based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when starting the symbol change display by the main display unit 37. The The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result, a variation pattern in a jackpot lottery for the increased hold, when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (see FIG. 22 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 when the reserved number N or the reserved number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the validity information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, that is, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state. This is set in the game state transition process in the main process. Since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, the sound lamp control device 5 receives the jackpot game start command and starts the jackpot game. In addition to this, it can be grasped that the opening is started. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may be made aware of the opening being started by the opening start command.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of round games in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. This is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. In addition, in the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to grasp that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening / closing execution mode is started, but separately from the round game start command, an opening end command is set at the end of the opening, Alternatively, the opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of round games to be started at the time of starting the round game may be set, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23 described later.

  The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37, and is described later with reference to FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process in step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and the number of segments (number of steps) to be turned on / off on the 7 segment display unit 39. Is determined.

  The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later. Set in

  It should be noted that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation which will be described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electronic role hold area 412c in the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and a setting of a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, the normal winning random number counter C4 used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric winning combination 315b of the second winning prize opening 315 is set to the electric winning open state, and initial values of the normal winning random number counter C4 are set. And a normal initial value counter CIN2 to be used. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value by the MPU 41 at short time intervals and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 during the big win lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The reserved storage area 412b includes a first reserved storage area REA, a second reserved storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the 7-segment display 372 displays the variable and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of variable game in which the big hit lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the seven-segment display 373 displays the variable display and the stop display may be referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 of the first reservation storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as success / failure information used in the lottery and is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the second reservation storage area REB. The acquisition processing of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing processing according to the control program. A lottery counter 412a (a big hit random number counter C1, a big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a variable type counter CS1, etc.) is individually provided for each of the first reserved storage area REA and the second reserved storage area REB. May be provided.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 includes the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB.

  Therefore, it is 19 against the variable game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4 of the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the second reservation storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REA1, the second reservation area REA2, the third reservation area REA3, and the fourth reservation area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-holds storage area NAA, the number in which the success / failure information is stored among the first to-hold areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number-of-holds N.

  When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the success / failure information is vacant in the priority order of the first reservation area REB1, the second reservation area REB2, the third reservation area REB3, and the fourth reservation area REB4. Stored in the area. In the reserved number storage area NAB, the number in which the success / failure information is stored among the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 is stored as the reserved number M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning slot 314 is provided by a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first reservation area REA1 to the fourth reservation area REA4 and the first reservation area REB1 to the fourth reservation area REB4. In addition, it is possible to hold up to four pieces of success / failure information as winning history to the second winning opening 315.

  In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment that a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 is provided in common with the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be combined. It is possible to hold the success / failure information as the winning history. The storing process of the success / failure information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  The execution area AE is the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA or the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. This is a storage area used for moving the validity information stored in the. Specifically, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and there is no success / failure information in the first reservation area REB1 of the second reservation storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  It should be noted that the difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In such a case, the value of the holding area having the larger number may be preferentially moved to the execution area AE as another embodiment. In another embodiment, the success / failure information of the first reserved area REA1 of the first reserved storage area REA and the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery based on the numerical information stored as the success / failure information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reservation area REA2 is shifted to the first reservation area REA1, and the third The success / failure information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first reserved area REB1 of the second reserved storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second reserved area REB2 is shifted to the first reserved area REB1, and the third reserved The success / failure information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the success / failure information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 637, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

  Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation gaming state, according to the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area in the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 14B is an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode.

  In the example shown in FIG. 14 (A) and FIG. 14 (B), as the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot (the jackpot probability) is the game set value. A plurality of different success / failure tables are provided accordingly. The low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table include six success / failure tables corresponding to the six game setting values 1 to 6, respectively. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

  In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 821 (0 to 820) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 9 (820/65536).

  In the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 845 (0 to 844) probability table success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 6 (845/65536).

  In the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 218 (0 to 217), high for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 869 (0-868) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately four times that in the low probability mode. 4 (869/65536).

  In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in a big win lottery result is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 893 (0 to 892) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 4 (893/65536).

  In the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 917 (0-916) probabilistic mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 5 (917/65536).

  In the game setting value 6, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random values that result in the big win lottery result is 236 (0 to 235), high for the low probability mode success / failure table. There are 941 (0 to 940) probability mode success / failure tables. That is, in the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is approximately 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is approximately 4 times that in the low probability mode. 6 (941/65536).

  Note that if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number value for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

  Here, in the low-probability mode success / failure table and the high-probability mode success / failure table, the same lottery results in the jackpot lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also possible that the random numbers that are jackpots are not common It is done. Further, the random numbers for winning the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or entirely discrete values.

  Further, six low probability mode success / failure tables and six high probability mode success / failure tables are provided according to the six stages of game setting values. That is, the game setting value is not limited to six levels. It is also conceivable to provide one low probability mode success / failure table while providing a plurality of low probability mode success / failure tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game setting values. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of stages of game setting values are provided for the low probability mode, and no stepwise game setting values are provided for the high probability mode, so that the jackpot probability is uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be uniform, and a plurality of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpot types, probability variation jackpot and normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411.

  Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (C), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first winning port 314, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variable jackpots is 0-9. The number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, if the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second prize opening 315, the number of random numbers that are 5R probability variation jackpots is five, 0-4, and 16R probability variation jackpots. The number of the fourth random numbers is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are normally 5R big hits is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability variation big hit in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation big hit in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol. In other words, the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) is a big hit compared to the short time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode). When the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit, the expected value of game balls to be acquired is set high.

  In the present embodiment, individual swings are provided for each of the first winning port 314 that triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning and each second winning port 315 that triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. There is a minute table, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same for the game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probability changing machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, V-ST machine, a kind-two-mixer, or the like.

  Based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, “5R normal hit” It is determined whether it is “big hit” or “off”.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the jackpot game is repeated five times. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

  In the case of 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, a transition is made to a probability variation gaming state that is a high probability mode with a high probability of winning a jackpot and a high frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. In the present embodiment, the probability variation gaming state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the game shifts to the short-time gaming state in the low-probability mode with a low probability of winning the jackpot and the high-frequency support mode with a high probability of opening the electric accessory 315b. In this embodiment, the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) informs the player of the lottery result in a jackpot lottery of a preset number of times set in advance, such as 50 times and 100 times. Or when the player determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot before the specified number of times has elapsed.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability changing machine, a jackpot of a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times or 100 times) set in advance after the jackpot game at the time of probability changing jackpot. When the lottery is executed in the probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the big lottery does not become a big hit by the specified number of times, the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency) Support mode) and the high frequency support mode ends. In addition, it is conceivable as another embodiment to perform a falling lottery from a probability variation game state to a short-time game state or a normal game state in a variable game. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state or the short-time gaming state. In this embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types of 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot, 16R regular jackpot.

  Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning slot 314 or the second winning slot 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the variable display stop result displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of place. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, the reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and the complete detachment where no reach occurs.

  Here, FIG. 14D is a diagram illustrating an example of the detachment type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14D, the random number value that becomes the front / rear out of reach is 0 to 8, the random number value other than the front / rear out reach is 9 to 38, and the random number value that is completely out of the range is 39. ~ 238. It should be noted that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in a variable game that wins a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, or a 5R normal jackpot, that is, a variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, “reach” indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won is likely to be between the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach variation state in the symbol display unit 341, a game in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation level, or a player's operation on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person-participation-type operation effect processing and the like are executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, and the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is incremented, for example, one by one within a range of 0 to 250, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination reservation area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 412c. For example, it is conceivable that the winning combination is made when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that the winning combination is lost when the electric accessory release counter C4 is 200 to 250.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in accordance with the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Thus, by determining the variation pattern type, the sound lamp control device 5 allows the rough variation game effects such as high-speed variation effects (basic effects, non-reach effects), normal reach effects, super reach effects, special reach effects, etc. The type is determined according to the variation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process, which will be described later, is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. In addition, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 identifies the type of variation pattern while referring to a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, or a deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these variation tables may be provided individually for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIG. 15A, FIG. 15B, and FIG. 15C are diagrams showing examples of a normal jackpot variation table, a probability variation jackpot variation table, and a deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 15A, FIG. 15B, and FIG. 15C, in the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously set according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot variation table, and when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot” or “16R probability variation jackpot”, the probability variation jackpot variation table, lottery When the result is “out”, the type of variation pattern is specified by referring to the out variation table.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach production pattern with a variation display time of 30 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the normal reach production pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the audio lamp control device 5 determines a super reach production pattern having a variation display time of 60 s as the variation type (production pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 performs the super reach production. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern “03” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest change display time of 90 s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 displays the special reach. A production pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (C), in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 for each stop type (rear / rear out reach, reach other than front / rear out, complete out) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. Correspondence relations with fluctuation patterns are defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of departure is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth, any of the variation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely out of the range, either the variation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. When the variation pattern “04” is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a reachless effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) having a variation display time of 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In unit 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed. When the variation pattern “05” is selected, the sound lamp control device 5 determines a reach-less effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) with a change display time of 10 s as the change type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. In unit 341, a non-reach effect pattern is executed.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of departure corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the variation pattern in which the variation display deviates without a notice effect such as a character or a message being displayed is stopped. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, the fluctuation display of the deviation pattern which stops with the symbol is displayed with a notice effect such as a character, a message or the like being displayed. Executed. In addition, in the case of the fluctuation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  Note that the types of variation patterns are not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15A, 15B, and 15C. The probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as normal reach effects to be executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “01”. The normal reach production is performed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach production with different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach production executed in the super reach production pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “02”. One of the super-reach productions is performed. Super reach production is a reach production with a longer variation time than normal reach production, the probability of winning a lottery in the jackpot lottery is higher than the normal reach production (expected degree), and wins more than the special reach production It is executed when the player is suggested that the probability (expectation) is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of special reach effects with different characters and stories are prepared as special reach effects to be executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern “03”. One of the special reach productions performed is executed. The special reach effect is a reach effect that has a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, for example, an effect that develops from a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach production is executed when the player is suggested to have a higher probability (expectation) of winning the jackpot than the normal reach production or the special reach production.

  Note that in the effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a single operation effect in which the single operation is reflected in the effect, or the operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which a continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  When the MPU 41 identifies the variation pattern indicating the variation display time by the 7-segment display units 372 and 373 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command indicating the variation pattern and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is displayed. Input to the sound lamp controller 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” with a change pattern command “A” indicating “5R normal jackpot”. Any one of “A01” to “A03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “B01” with “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “B03” is output. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 precedes the variation patterns “01” to “03” with a variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Any one of “C03” is output. In addition, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 adds fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the fluctuation patterns are “01” to “05” before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. One of the following is output. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces sound from the speaker 26 according to the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process for determining the variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. Moreover, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, a variety of variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

  FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 of the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine shown in FIG. In the game information storage area 412d, game information related to game history, play performance, and the like are stored. In the present embodiment, the game information storage area 412d includes, as game information, “number of out balls”, “number of payout balls for general winning mouth”, “number of payout balls for first winning mouth”, and “number of payout balls for second winning mouth”. ”,“ Variable prize slot payout number ”,“ Game setting value ”,“ Base information ”,“ Continuous feature ratio information ”,“ Composition ratio information ”,“ Cumulative jackpot lottery count ”,“ Unit jackpot lottery count ” , “Number of big hits” and “number of consecutive misses” are stored. Among these pieces of game information, “game setting value”, “base information”, “continuous feature ratio information”, “composition ratio information”, and “unit big hit number of lotteries” are game information (performance information) )

  The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in a normal game state (a state with a low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). The “number of out balls” is stored as a value obtained by counting the number of out balls detected by the out ball sensor 35 in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interruption process of FIG. 20 described later.

  The “general winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the general winning opening 313 in a normal gaming state (a state of low probability mode and not a high frequency support mode). This “general winning opening payout ball number” is the setting of the winning ball command in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later when the winning sensor 313a detects a winning in the general winning slot 313 in the normal gaming state. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the general winning opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of paying balls due to the current winning. .

  The “number of first winning mouth payout balls” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the first winning mouth 314 in a normal gaming state (a state that is in a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode). . This “first winning opening payout ball number” is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later when the winning sensor 314a detects a winning to the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out at the current winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the first winning port 314 in the command setting process Update to

  The “number of payout balls for the second winning opening” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the second winning opening 315 in the short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). . This “second winning mouth payout ball number” is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later when the winning sensor 315a detects a winning in the second winning mouth 315 in the short-time gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out in this winning when setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the second winning opening 315 in the command setting process Update to

  The “variable winning opening payout ball number” is an integrated value of game balls to be paid out for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). This “variable winning opening payout ball number” is set in the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23 described later when a winning to the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the winning ball sensor 316a in the big hit gaming state. When setting a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the value is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning. .

  Note that the “out-of-balls”, “general winning-out / out-of-balls”, “first winning-out / out-of-balls”, “second winning-out / out-of-balls” and “variable winning-out / out-of-balls” In the specific performance information update process of 28, when “the number of out balls” reaches 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), it is cleared to 0 balls (step S1810).

  The “game setting value” is used to select a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) used in the big hit lottery (win / no decision). . In other words, the “game setting value” defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In this embodiment, as will be described later, there are four stages of game setting values (four types of low probability mode success / failure tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14 (A)) and high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14 (B)). ) Has been prepared. The “game setting value” is updated in a game setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later.

  The “base information” is information related to “base” which is a payout rate (a payout rate) in a normal gaming state (a state that is in a low probability mode but not a high frequency support mode), and this “base” is a normal gaming state Is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the “number of payout balls for the general winning opening” and the “number of payout balls for the first winning mouth” with respect to the “number of out balls” in FIG. When “base” is expressed by a mathematical formula, “base” = 100 × (“number of payout balls for general winning mouth” + “number of payout balls for first winning mouth”) / “number of out balls”. The “base information” includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the last 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later (steps S1807 and S1808). Specifically, the “base” when the latest number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is the previous 60,000 ball base B1, and the “base” when the previous number of out balls reaches 60000 balls is Each time as the 60,000 coin base B2, the game information storage area of the RAM 412 is stored as “base information”. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60000 balls, the current base BL is calculated (step S1803), and the current base BL is stored as “base information” in the game information storage area of the RAM 412.

  In the present embodiment, the “base information” includes “current base BL”, “previous 60,000 base B1” and “previous 60,000 base B2”, and the past 60,000 bases are recorded in history. However, you may make it leave the past 60,000 bases more than three times as a history. Further, the “base information” may include a cumulative base from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

  “Consecutive character ratio information” indicates the total number of balls to be paid out by winning a prize to all winning holes (general winning holes 313, first winning holes 314, second winning holes 315, and variable winning holes 316) for which prize balls are paid out. The information regarding the “continuous character ratio”, which is the ratio occupied by the number of payouts for the variable winning opening. When the “continuous character ratio” is expressed by a mathematical expression, “continuous character ratio” = 100 × “variable winning award payout ball number” / “total payout ball number”. “Continuous character ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “continuous character ratio information” is stored as a cumulative continuous character ratio from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. “Consecutive character ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the ratio of the continuous feature with respect to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls) may be used. Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative continuous character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a certain number of periods.

  “Composition ratio information” is the total number of balls paid out by winning to all winning ports (general winning port 313, first winning port 314, second winning port 315, and variable winning port 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information relating to an “object ratio” which is a ratio occupied by the total number of payout balls in the second prize port payout balls and the variable prize port payout balls. Expressing the “role ratio” as a mathematical expression, it is “ratio of bonuses” = 100 × (“number of payouts for second winning mouth” + “number of payouts for variable winning mouth”) / “total number of payouts”. “Composition item ratio information” is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “combination item ratio information” is stored as the accumulated combination rate from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. In addition, the “rights ratio information” is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) in the normal gaming state, It may be a ratio of an accessory to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, the “continuous character ratio information” may include both the cumulative character ratio and the character ratio over a certain period.

  The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” refers to the normal gaming state (the state that is in the low probability mode but not the high frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present time before the game hall starts business. It is the number of times that the jackpot lottery was performed. In other words, the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is also the cumulative variation display count in which the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 is executed in response to winning in the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. is there. The “cumulative jackpot lottery count” is incremented by one each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the variation start processing of FIG. Further, the “cumulative lottery number of lotteries” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  “Number of lottery per unit jackpot” refers to a lottery lottery triggered by winning a prize to the first winning port 314 for a certain number of negative difference balls in a normal gaming state (in a low probability mode but not in a high frequency support mode). This is the number of times received (the number of times the symbol variation display of the 7-segment display 372 of the main display unit 37 has been executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is “250 balls”, and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the “general winning port payout ball number” and the “first winning port payout ball number” from the “out ball number”. In other words, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is the number of symbol variations displayed on the 7-segment indicator 372 (the number of jackpot lottery wins) averaged at 1000 yen when receiving 250 balls for 1000 yen in a game hall. is there. The “unit jackpot number of lotteries” may be the number of times that a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of “out balls” in the normal gaming state. “Number of lottery per unit jackpot” is updated in step S1805 in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28 described later. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is stored as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The “unit jackpot lottery count” refers to a certain period (for example, a certain number of jackpot numbers (for example, 100 times), a period until a certain number of jackpot lotteries (for example, 1000 times) is executed in the normal gaming state, The number of out balls may be for a certain number (for example, a period until reaching 60,000 balls). Of course, as the “unit big hit lottery number”, both the cumulative unit big hit lottery number and the unit big hit lottery number in a certain period may be stored as game information.

  “Number of jackpots” is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed from the start of the gaming machine 10 to the present before the game hall starts operating is a jackpot. The “hit number” is incremented by one each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. Further, the “number of jackpots” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off.

  “Number of consecutive misses” is the number of times that the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are continuously missed in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode but not the high frequency support mode), and the lottery result is a jackpot If cleared to 0 times. The “number of consecutive losing times” is the result of the go / no-go determination based on the low probability mode go / no-go table in step S1603 when the symbol change display of the main display unit 37 is started in step S1606 in the change start process of FIG. If it is off, 1 is added, and if the result of the determination is a big hit, it is cleared to 0. In the present embodiment, the “number of consecutive failures” is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when the main power supply of the gaming machine 10 is turned off. Of course, the “number of consecutive failures” may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power supply of the gaming machine 10.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays “base information” and “game setting values” stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. is there. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a game set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance information display device 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays “base information” in the gaming machine 10 and is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized when the inner frame 12 is expanded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. May be provided. It is also conceivable to display “base information” using the two 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37.

  The 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 can display numbers “0” to “9” and alphabets “A” to “F”. In the 7-segment display 431-434, when displaying the alphabet “B”, the dot is lit to display “8.” to distinguish it from the number “8”, and the alphabet “D” is displayed. In order to distinguish from the number “0”, the dot is lit and displayed as “0.”. In addition, when displaying any of the alphabets “A” to “F”, it is also conceivable to light a dot to clearly indicate that it is an alphabet.

  The performance display monitor 43 is an identification segment in which the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 display “base type” as an abbreviated symbol, and the right two 7-segment displays The display units 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, if the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviation symbols “BL” of the current base BL are “8.”, “L” in the left two 7-segment indicators 431 and 432 that are identification segments. The base value “31” is displayed as “3” and “1” in the right two 7-segment indicators 433 and 434 that are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434, “8.”, “L”, “3”, and “1” are displayed in order from the left.

  The performance display switch 44 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434) at the same time by a pressing operation. Provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power supply is turned on when the upper half of the performance display switch 44 is pressed, and the power is turned off when the lower half is pressed. When an operation to turn on the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when an operation to turn off the power to the performance display switch 44 is performed, the energization to the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed. . The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main controller 4.

  Here, FIG. 18A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the base information is not displayed because the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 are off. As shown in FIGS. 18B to 18D, when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, the current base BL → the previous 60,000 as “base information” unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off. The base is looped in order of the ball base B1 → the previous 60,000 ball base B2 → the current base BL, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 18 (B), the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18 (C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%. In the example shown in the figure, the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% before the last time. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that a program necessary for displaying the “base information” on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program for calculating the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B 1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B 2, and the performance display monitor 43 A program for sequentially displaying the BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided in the main controller 4 separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41. Thereby, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in the ROM 411. In addition, a program necessary for displaying “base information” on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

  Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of “base information” or in addition to “base information”, it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as “continuous character ratio information” and “character ratio information”. Other performance information may be displayed.

  Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the game set value display unit 45 selects a low-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. In order to display the above-mentioned game setting value, it is composed of a 7-segment display. Note that the game set value display unit 45 is not limited to a 7-segment display, and may be configured by other forms of display such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, or an organic EL display, and uses the performance display monitor 43. The game setting value may be displayed.

  The set value change operation unit 46 switches on / off the power of the 7-segment display by a pressing operation, and allows the game set value to be changed by being rotated when the power of the 7-segment display is on. The set value change operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation and a function as a rotary switch that switches a contact by a rotation operation (rotation at a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a display example on the game setting value display unit 45 of the main control device.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed when the game set value display unit 45 is in the extinguished state, the game set value is obtained by energizing the 7-segment display. A number is displayed on the display unit 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and indicate the current game setting values. In the illustrated example, the game setting value is “1”. On the other hand, when the setting value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lit state, the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off by turning off the power to the 7-segment display. It becomes a state.

  As shown in FIG. 18 (B), when the game setting value display unit 45 is in the lighting state, when the rotation operation is performed on the setting value change operation unit 46, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed. Is done. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is increased by rotating the game setting value display unit 45 to the right, and the game setting value display unit is displayed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45 to the left. The number displayed in the part 45 becomes smaller. When the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the game setting value display unit 45, the changed number is stored as a game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The Therefore, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the number corresponding to the target game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 and the power of the 7-segment display is turned off, The number displayed immediately before being turned off is determined as the game setting value. As a result, the MPU 41 selects a low-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) or a high-probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) selected according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A lottery lottery can be performed based on (see)).

  The method for changing the game set value is not limited to the method of turning off the power of the game set value display unit 45 after rotating the set value change operation unit 46. For example, by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), the game setting value is determined, or by pressing or holding down the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1) repeatedly. A method of turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45, by inserting a key into a key hole provided in the main controller 4 or the like and rotating the key A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 may be used.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, the symbol variation display and The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as a sound used for a variable game effect, a jackpot game effect, and a lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is input, and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the playback sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 when executing a later-described variable game effect and jackpot game effect.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26 and an electrical decoration unit 27. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 receives the sound output from the speaker 26 based on the command input from the main control device 4, the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38. It is possible to control the up and down movement, the 7 segment display unit 39 and the like. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retaining portion 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out) that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37 in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retaining portion 38. A state in which the ball) is retained and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged through the discharge lane 382. Further, by controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 by the MPU 51, the number of segments corresponding to the number of special out balls retained in the game ball retaining unit 38 are individually turned on or off. An operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that an operation has been performed on the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, an image game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341, and a sound is output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect by the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

  Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 changes the variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination (see FIG. 36A)), variation display time, variation type (FIG. 36) based on the variation pattern command. (See (A))) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 37A to 37C), and the display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (FIG. 35). In step S2105 in the command determination process, the symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 executes a ball performance suggestion image display process for displaying a ball performance suggestion image that suggests the ball performance on the sub-image display unit 38.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as a variation symbol such as a main symbol used in symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, a notice effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, and a loss effect image. ing. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of the change symbol. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71 and an input / output I / F 72. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the dispensing control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, in order to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the amount of money that is lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32 increases as the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Furthermore, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like when it is determined that the power supply is cut off. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the control being executed is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after the startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, description of the startup process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the incoming sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 35, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball to any of the ball entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412. In addition, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 35, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 and updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d. To do. Further, when a special out ball is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command and stores the special out ball detection command in the RAM 412. Note that the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d reaches 60,000 balls, and is cleared to 0 balls when the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is calculated (step S1810 in the specific performance information update process in FIG. 28). reference).

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum values. In this case, the counter value is cleared to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
Thereafter, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning the first winning port 314 or the second winning port 315 (step S1004), and executes a launch control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the launch of. In addition, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 draws a lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric combination 315b of the second winning opening 315 based on the normal winning random number counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 412c. The through gate process is executed. Specifically, in the through gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency support mode flag. If the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. It is judged that. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and determines that the normal symbol is won, and the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. It is judged that. When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is won in the through gate process, the MPU 315b opens the electric accessory 315b for a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to win the second winning opening 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged in parallel.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S <b> 1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning for the first winning opening 314. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and if it determines that there is no winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106 if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes). On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 20, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 23). And the counter value of S1312) is acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REA1 to REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the contents of the success / failure information before the success / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target for determining whether or not the jackpot is successful in the change start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. Confirmation is performed, and a first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there is a winning for the second winning opening 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there is a winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and when it is determined that there is no winning for the second winning opening 315 (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S <b> 1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations M is the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations M is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 20, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 in FIG. 23). And the counter value of S1312) is acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area among the first reserved areas REB1 to REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether the success / failure information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 is subject to determination of the success / failure process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. The content is confirmed, and a second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the check result. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. In the first hold command setting process of FIG. 22, the second hold command setting process reads “first hold command” as “second hold command” and “hold number N” as “hold number M”. Good.

[First pending command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or miss), a variation pattern, and the number N of hold. . Hereinafter, the first pending command setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode. If the MPU 41 is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203, and if not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and is set to ON at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition processing (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main processing described later. Judgment is made based on a high probability mode flag that is set to OFF when transitioning to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads the high probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 14B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the success / failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 14A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Based on the probability mode success / failure table, whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed.

  In steps S1203 and S1204, determination of success / failure is performed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. However, in step S1203 or S1204, after reading out the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or a low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read out from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads out the counter values of the big hit type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the success / failure information is stored in the third reserved area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variation type included in the success / failure information stored in the third reserved area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read. Of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4, the reserved area in which the success / failure information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21 is the value of the reserved number N stored in the reserved number storage area NA. It can be judged by.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the hold number N to the first hold command. Thus, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command receives the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 corresponds to the validity information stored in the first hold area REA1.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of date, the variation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  Note that the first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and the other is performed in step S1301 of the main process in FIG. 23 described later that is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. After being transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 together with this command, it is deleted. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and is not limited to that described here as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that part or all of the information of the first pending command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, for example, and the counter update process of steps S1310 to S1312 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next period. The

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 sends output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the external output process to be sent to. For example, in the RAM 412, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a game setting value change command, a unit jackpot lottery number update command, etc. If set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, etc. based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 stores the game information in the RAM 412 in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode but not in the high frequency support mode) when a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314. The number of payout balls for the general winning opening or the number of payout balls for the first winning opening stored in the area 412d is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls for the current winning prize. In addition, the MPU 41 receives the second prize opening 315 in the short-time gaming state (the state that is the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode) or the probability variation gaming state (the state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode). When a winning has occurred, the number of the second winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of payout balls due to the current winning. Further, in the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 uses the variable winning opening payout ball number stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in the case of winning in the variable winning opening 316 as the number of payout balls due to this winning. Is updated to the value obtained by adding.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a change pattern command necessary for the symbol change display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Is done. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, and the fluctuations updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of lottery lottery and variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, a control process for the jackpot game including the opening, the opening / closing execution mode and the ending is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the open / close door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and the result of the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game (a jackpot type) ) Run as many times as you like. For example, when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, the MPU 41 executes the round game five times, and when the jackpot type is 16R probability jackpot, the round game is executed 16 times. In the jackpot game control process, a round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting each round game in the opening / closing execution mode, and an ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when starting ending.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the big hit lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the variation start process of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 changes the gaming state when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot gaming state in which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the probability variation gaming state in which the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are in effect, the low probability mode and the high probability mode. A transition is made to a short-time gaming state in the frequency support mode, a normal gaming state not in the high-frequency support mode in the low probability mode, or the like.

  For example, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game ends, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the jackpot game ends, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot In some cases, after the jackpot game is over, a transition to the short-time game state is made. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lotteries is completed in the short-time gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the normal gaming state after the end of the variable game.

  Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to OFF, and sets the flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, when the game state transitions from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot gaming flag to off while setting the high probability mode flag to on. On the other hand, when the game state transitions from the probability variation gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the high probability mode flag is set to OFF while the jackpot gaming flag is set to ON.

  Further, when the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot gaming start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the “number of jackpots” stored in the gaming information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a game setting value change process. In this game setting value change process, a process for controlling the display or non-display of the game setting value or the change of the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d according to the operation on the setting value changing operation unit 46 is executed. The Details of the game setting value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the game setting value change process is executed in the main process. However, during the start-up process that is activated when the power is turned on, or after the start-up process, the launch of the game ball is started. It is also conceivable that the execution is limited. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the game setting value cannot be changed until the next power-on, so that the game setting value can be changed within the business hall operating hours. Can be prevented.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of lottery per unit lottery, the continuous bonus rate, and the bonus rate are updated as the specific performance information. Details of the specific performance information update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes display control processing of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. Details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the next main process execution timing has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1301, and each process after S1301 described above is executed. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until the next time, until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), step S1310, step S1311, and step S1312 are repeatedly executed.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is performed. When the game is over and the game is not in a jackpot game (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. The presence or absence of execution of the jackpot game is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, for example, and is OFF when shifting from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to Step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is in progress is set to ON at the start of variation display in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later, and the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). This determination is made based on the variable display flag set to OFF in step S1405 of the variable game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If the MPU 41 determines that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 to stop display the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game ( In step S1404), the variable display flag is set to OFF (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 sets the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and the number of holds M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes). On the other hand, when either one of the hold number N and the hold number M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the validity information stored in the hold storage area 412b. If the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1407, the process proceeds to step S1408. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a change start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a change display based on the validity information, and ends the change game control process. Details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). Then, the process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number M of holds is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number N of holdings stored in the holding number storage area NAA (step S1502), and moves from the first holding area REA1 to the execution area AE. The success / failure information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 to the fourth reservation area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the success / failure information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the success / failure information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the fourth reservation area REA4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REA3. When the process of step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 moves the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is shifted when the number M of holdings is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is shifted when both or one of the holding number M and the holding number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, the MPU 41 executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507 because it can be determined that the hold number N is not 0 when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No).

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the reservation number M stored in the reservation number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the success / failure information from the first reservation area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reservation area REB2 to the fourth reservation area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the validity information of the second reserved area REB2 is moved to the first reserved area REB1, the validity information of the third reserved area REB3 is moved to the second reserved area REB2, and the fourth reserved area REB4 The success / failure information is moved to the third reserved area REB3. When the process of step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the validity information of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 or the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed. When the process of step S1508 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and proceeds to step S1408 of FIG.

[Variation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the change start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. Hereinafter, the variation start process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag that is set to ON in the gaming state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 is set to ON. . When the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1602, and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 holds the reserved storage area based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 14B) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 holds based on the low probability mode acceptance / rejection table (see FIG. 14A) stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the hit information stored in the execution area AE of the storage area 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined.

  In steps S1602 and S1603, the determination of success / failure is executed based on the high probability mode success / failure table or the low probability mode success / failure table stored in accordance with the game setting value in step S1712 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. However, in steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the game setting value stored in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. 27 described later, a high probability mode success / failure table or a low probability corresponding to the game setting value is read. The mode determination table may be selected one by one to perform the determination.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variation game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the determination of success / failure in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15A). Identify. Further, when the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). . Further, if the result of the determination in step S1602 or S1603 is out of place, the MPU 41 specifies a variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the out-of-range variation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern specified in step S1604 in the RAM 412. Thereby, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

  As described above, when the lottery result is “ordinary big hit”, the MPU 41 adds “A” indicating “5R normal big hit” to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. Any of “A03” is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the MPU 41 adds any one of “B01” to “B03” to which “B” indicating that the variation pattern “01” to “03” is 5R probability variation big hit is added. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the MPU 41 adds any of “C01” to “C03” with “C” added to the variation patterns “01” to “03” indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the variation patterns “01” to “08”. A command is set in the RAM 412. In addition, when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 41 includes information on whether the front / rear out of reach, reach other than out of front / back out, or complete out is included in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, and ends the variation start process. When the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 sets the variation display flag to ON. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 37 is being performed. In addition, when the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “cumulative jackpot lottery count” stored in the game information storage area 412 d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the determination of success / failure based on the low probability mode success / failure table in step S1603 is out of order, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the “number of consecutive failures” stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the success / failure result is a big hit. In some cases, the “number of consecutive failures” is cleared to zero.

[Game setting value change processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value change process executed in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. Hereinafter, the game setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed. If the symbol variation display is being performed (step S1701: Yes), the game setting value changing process is terminated. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process proceeds to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is determined based on the variation display flag set to ON in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG.

<Step S1702>
When the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming state is set (step S1702). If the jackpot gaming state is set (step S1702: Yes), the game setting is made. When the value change process is finished and the game is not in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: No), the process proceeds to step S1703. For example, whether or not the game is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to ON in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display nor the big hit gaming state is present (both No in steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game setting value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703). It is determined whether or not an operation to turn on the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the setting value change operation unit 46. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the symbol variation display is in progress (step S1701: Yes) or when the jackpot gaming state is in effect (step S1702: Yes), the game setting value is not displayed and the game setting value can be changed. Absent. Here, when the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1704, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is turned on from off. If not switched to (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1703: YES), the MPU 41 reads out the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1703). In step S1704, a number indicating the read game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1705). Thereby, the current game setting value can be confirmed. Then, the MPU 41 turns on a setting value display flag indicating that the game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 (step S1706), and ends the game setting value changing process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the game set value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the game set value is displayed on the game set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. When the setting value display flag is set on (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1708, and when the setting value display flag is set off (step S1707: No). That is, when the game setting value display unit 45 is turned off and the power is not turned on, the game setting value changing process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value change operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the game setting value has been performed. When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1709, and when the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No). The processing moves to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the game set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle. Conversely, when the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle, a number that is one smaller than the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

  If the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “4”, and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the right by a predetermined angle, the game set value display unit 45 is displayed. When the displayed number is changed to “1” and the number displayed on the game set value display unit 45 before the rotation is “1”, the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated to the left by a predetermined angle. In this case, the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is changed to “4”. In addition, when the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is “4”, the game setting value display unit 45 is prevented from rotating further to the right, and the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 is “1”. In some cases, it may be prevented from rotating further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites the game setting value in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 with the number being displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 as a game setting value, and ends the game setting value changing process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally stored in the RAM 412 as an effective game setting value. It is stored in the game information storage area 412d. Therefore, the game setting value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the game setting value display unit 45 by rotating the setting value changing operation unit 46. Then, the game setting value can be determined by turning off the power of the game setting value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target game setting value is displayed on the game setting value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value change operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the game set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value. It is determined whether or not an operation for turning off the game setting value display unit 45 has been performed on the change operation unit 46. When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1712, and the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off. If not (step S1711: No), the game setting value changing process is terminated. In addition, when the power supply of the game setting value display part 45 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1711: Yes), in the game setting value display part 45, the energization to the 7-segment display is cut off, thereby the game setting value. The number indicating is turned off, and the game setting value is determined as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the game setting value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 is in the low probability mode according to the game setting value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. The success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the setting value display flag to OFF, and ends the game setting value changing process.

  Here, in step S1712, a low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14A) and a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 14B) corresponding to the game setting values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. ) Is selected. That is, since the success / failure table of the same game setting value is selected in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the game setting value changing operation is easy. However, the game setting value in the low probability mode and the game setting value in the high probability mode may be individually changeable. In this case, for example, the game setting value in the low probability mode is set to “1” and the game setting value in the high probability mode is set to “4”. It becomes possible to make it a set value.

[Performance information update processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1309 in the main process of FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. The specific performance information update process will be described below with reference to FIGS.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of various payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and further determines the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Reading is performed (step S1802). Here, the number of payout balls is the number of payout balls necessary for updating the base information and the like. The number of payout balls for the general winning opening, the number of payout balls for the first winning mouth, the number of payout balls for the second winning mouth, and the variable payout opening ball Number is applicable. Then, the MPU 41 calculates the current base BL based on the read number of general winning award payout balls, the number of first payout payout balls, and the number of out balls, and the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is calculated. The current base BL is overwritten and updated (step S1803) (see FIG. 29A). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (number of payouts for general winning mouth + number of payouts for first winning mouth) / out number of balls.

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
The MPU 41 reads the cumulative jackpot lottery count (cumulative variation display count) stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1804), and updates the unit jackpot lottery count stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1805). The number of lottery per unit jackpot is calculated as the number of symbol variations displayed on the 7-segment display 372 (the number of times the jackpot lottery is received) until the number of minus difference balls in the normal gaming state is 250. Specifically, the number of lottery per unit jackpot = “cumulative jackpot lottery count” / ((“number of out balls” − “number of balls paid out for general winning mouth” − “number of balls paid out for first winning mouth”) / 250 balls) Is done. In the present embodiment, the “unit jackpot lottery count” is calculated as the cumulative unit jackpot lottery count from when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present.

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of out balls read out in step S1802 has reached 60000 balls. If the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1807. When the number of out balls has not reached 60000 balls (step S1806: No), the specific performance information update process is terminated.

<Steps S1807 to S1810>
When the number of out balls has reached 60000 balls (step S1806: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the 60,000 ball base last time in the base information (step S1807), and step S1803. The current base BL updated in step S1 is shifted to the previous 60,000 ball base B1 (step S1808), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1809). Then, the MPU 41 clears various payout balls and out balls in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls (step S1810), and ends the specific performance information update process.

[Display control processing of performance display monitor]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 described later or step S1930 in FIG. When the BL display flag is set on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1908 in FIG. 31 and when the BL display flag is set off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
If the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 has been displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. When the B1 display flag is set on (step S1902: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1918 in FIG. 32, and when the B1 display flag is set off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 has been displayed two times before the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. When the B2 display flag is set on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926 in FIG. 33, and when the B2 display flag is set off (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
If the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No), The display control process ends.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from OFF to ON (step S1904: YES), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, the current base BL is 29% indicating “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 27B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1906), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S1907), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 29, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 30 (step S1908). ), It is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1910, and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, “8.”, “1” indicating that the previous 60,000 base B1 is 33%. ”,“ 3 ”,“ 3 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is the example shown in FIG. “8.”, “1”, “2” and “9” indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to ON (step S1912), sets a B1 display time counter for displaying the previous 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a predetermined time (step S1913), and The display control process ends.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1915, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 displays the current base BL by turning off the power to the 7-segment indicators 431 to 434. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1914: YES), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to OFF (step S1915), and clears the value of the BL display time counter to 0 (step S1914). S1916), the display control process ends.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to ON (step S1902: YES), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. In step S1917, it is determined whether the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1919, and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The 60,000-ball base B2 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1920). For example, if the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, “8.”, “2” indicating that the 60,000 base B2 is 32% the previous time. ”,“ 3 ”and“ 2 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and the base information is an example shown in FIG. “8.”, “2”, “3”, and “3” indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to ON (step S1921), and sets a B2 display time counter corresponding to a predetermined time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 the previous time (step S1922). Then, the display control process ends.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434, and the previous 60,000 ball base B1. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1923: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to OFF (step S1924), and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step S1924). In step S1925, the display control process ends.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to ON (step S1903: YES), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1928, and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No) ), And the process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 The current state base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29A, the current base BL is 29% indicating “8.”, “L”, “ 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29B, the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment indicators 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to ON (step S1930), sets a BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control processing. Exit.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1933, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), The display control process ends. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the power to the 7-segment display units 431 to 434 before the 60,000 ball base B2 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from ON to OFF (step S1932: YES), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to OFF (step S1933), and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1932). S1934), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 51 in the sound lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 in this embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing for the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, start-up processing at the time of start-up of the sound lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of power failure, etc. Explanation of these processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 performs a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), a variable game effect process (step S2003), and a jackpot game effect process (step S2004). , And a game setting value display process (step S2005).

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the variation display counter, the control order pattern type counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the main symbol to be stopped first based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99. The effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is being performed, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. In addition, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value in the control order pattern type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The control order pattern type counter updated here is used to determine the order of control of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. For example, the control order pattern type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0-99.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main controller 4. If the MPU 51 receives a command (step S2101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received a command (step S2101: No), the command determination process ends. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. It should be noted that the command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2101 and is erased from the unprocessed command storage area when it becomes a processing target. Remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variation pattern command. If the MPU 51 is a variation pattern command (step S2102: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2103. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2102: No), the process proceeds to step S2108.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (main symbol stop symbol combination and effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 36A), a variation type table (see FIG. 36B), and an effect type table (preliminarily stored in the ROM 511). The variation pattern is determined on the basis of the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 and the values shown in FIGS. 37A to 37C. In addition, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R probability jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type Is 16R probability variation jackpot, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a main symbol that is stopped and displayed second, and the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed last. It is a design. The effect type table corresponds to a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 37A), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 37B), and special reach. Special reach production pattern type selection table (see FIG. 37C).

  FIG. 36A shows an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) that is first stopped and displayed in the symbol display unit 341 is determined. In FIG. 36 (A), the main symbols are “1” to “9”, and “333” is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot), “777”. ”Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that it is a symbol combination other than“ 333 ”and“ 777 ”that indicates that either the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 16R probability variation jackpot is selected. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “3” and “7” It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the symbol combination “333” or “777” indicating 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, there is no distribution of “7” as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than “7”. That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability variation big hit”, the symbol combination “777” indicating that it is 16R probability variation big hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combination indicating 5R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. In other words, even if the lottery result is “5R probability variation jackpot”, symbol combinations other than “333” symbol combinations whose main symbol stop display result suggests 5R normal jackpots can be stopped and displayed. If the main symbol other than “3” except “7” is determined as the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, the MPU 51 indicates that it is a 5R probability variable jackpot in the jackpot game. The 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified is executed.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result is “16-probable big hit”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation big hit”, symbol combinations other than “777” that indicate 16R probability variation big hit can be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot”, the symbol combination other than “777” symbol combination indicating that the main symbol stop display result indicates 5R probability variation jackpot or 5R normal jackpot is stopped. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

  Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same as the first stop symbol determined previously. Thereby, the stop symbol combination which is stopped and displayed on the active line of the symbol display unit 341 in the game time is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is “out”, there is a distribution for all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. Is done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is “off”, the MPU 51 selects the outage type selected based on the outage type table (FIG. 14D) and the first stop determined earlier. A second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the detachment type is front / rear detachment reach, the second stop symbol is determined as the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined as the symbol before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than front / rear detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. It is determined by the design. When the detachment type is complete detachment, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. Note that the stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 36B is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation type table. As shown in FIG. 36 (B), in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, a variation display command “A01” having a lottery result “normal jackpot” and a variation pattern “01” is associated with a variation display time “30 s” and a variation type “normal reach effect pattern”. Also, the variation display command “B02” having the lottery result “5R probability variation jackpot” and the variation pattern “02” is associated with the variation display time “60 s” and the variation type “super reach production pattern”. The variation display command “C03” whose lottery result is “16R probability variation jackpot” and variation pattern is “03” is associated with the variation display time “90 s” and the variation type “special reach effect pattern”. Further, the variation display command “D04” with the lottery result “out” and the variation pattern “04” is associated with the variation display time “7 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”. The variation display command “D05” with the result “out” and the variation pattern “05” is associated with the variation display time “10 s” and the variation type “non-reach effect pattern”.

  Further, FIGS. 37A to 37C are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 37A is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table that is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 37B is the final in the variable game effect. FIG. 37C is a super reach production pattern type selection table that is referred to when the individual production type is the super reach production, and FIG. 37C is referred to when the final individual production type in the variable game production is the special reach production. It is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

  In this embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each variation type will be described as an example. However, the number of types of effects may be six or more. Also, in FIG. 37, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach production pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37A, the production pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the production pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal big hit, 5R probability variation big hit, 16R probability variation big hit, and off). "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the production pattern X1 to the production pattern X3 included in the normal reach production pattern type selection table are, for example, production in which a normal reach production in which the main symbol is in a reach state is executed after the high-speed variation production in which the main symbol fluctuates at high speed. The final individual effect type is an effect that becomes a normal reach effect.

  Also, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37 (B), “effect pattern Y1” to “effect pattern Y5” are determined as effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It has been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is a super reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect pattern Y1 to effect pattern Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal reach effect as the final individual effect type. It is a production that develops into a super-reach production that is higher and has a longer production execution time than a normal reach production. In addition, the super reach production pattern type selection table may include a super reach production pattern production that develops into a super reach production after the high-speed fluctuation production is completed without going through the normal reach production.

  Furthermore, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 37C, “effect pattern Z1” to “effect pattern Z5” are determined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. It has been. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the normal individual reach effect and the super as the final individual effect type. It is an effect that develops into a special reach effect that has a higher expectation level than the reach effect and has a longer execution time than the normal reach effect. The special reach production pattern type selection table includes a special reach production pattern that develops into a special reach production after the end of the high-speed fluctuation production or the normal reach production without passing through at least one of the normal reach production and the super reach production. May be.

  Then, the MPU 51 stores in the RAM 512 a display variation pattern command indicating a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table, and a stop symbol combination of the main symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and the variation type (effect pattern type). Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 35, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The variation display time is determined according to variation pattern information included in the variation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S2001 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol fluctuation display is being performed based on the fluctuation display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter reaches zero.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type). The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores main symbol variation images and effect images corresponding to the display variation pattern commands. Thereby, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display in the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes a variable display of a plurality of main symbols (for example, three) until a preset variable display time elapses. The main symbol fluctuations are stopped and displayed in order. During the main symbol variation display, various effects corresponding to the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. .

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is started, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2107, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2106: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an opening effect, an ending effect, and an opening / closing execution mode effect that are executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not the opening effect start process is executed in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. Referenced when judging.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating that a round game in the open / close execution mode is started, and is set when a round game is started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2110, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No), the process Goes to step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to ON (step S2310). The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start a round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2204 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is to be ended, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, when the received command is a round game end command (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2112. When the received command is not a round game end command (step S2111: No), the processing is performed. The process proceeds to step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S2111: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to ON (step S2312). The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2204 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special out ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37, and is the main timer in FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, when the received command is a special out ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2114, and when the received command is not a special out ball detection command (step S2113: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out ball detection flag to ON. The special out ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out ball counter in step S2207 in the game setting value display process of FIG.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating that ending in the jackpot game is started, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. If the received command is an ending start command (step S2115: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2116. If the received command is not an ending start command (step S2115: No), the MPU 51 performs the process. The process proceeds to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to ON. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interruption process of FIG. The ending effect start flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2201 in the game setting value display processing of FIG. 38 whether or not the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. Is done.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is to be ended, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2118, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2117: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect). In the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, whether or not to execute the ending effect end process is determined. It is referred to when judging. The jackpot game effect end flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 39 whether or not the currently lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39 is turned off.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a game setting value change command. The game setting value change command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the game setting value has been changed and the changed game setting value, and is set in step S1710 in the game setting value changing process of FIG. Is done. Here, when the received command is a game setting value change command (step S2119: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2120, and when the received command is not a game setting value change command (step S2119: No). Then, the process proceeds to step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes and stores the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed game setting value included in the game setting value change command. Note that the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2305 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 39 described later, and is referred to in order to determine the control order of the segments in the 7-segment display unit 39. The

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 executes processing based on other commands received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination processing.

[Variable game effect processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect process (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the command determination process of FIG. 35 is performed when a variable pattern command is received in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the big win lottery. A variable game effect corresponding to the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like.

[Big hit game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) of the sub timer interrupt process, the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 35 are executed.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball staying part 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment of the 7-segment display part 39 are controlled. . Here, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 38, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the ending effect is started by the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is set on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is set off (step S2201: No). ), And the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is set to on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set to on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 35 is set to on. Is determined (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position by the 5R normal big hit flag. Here, when the 5R normal big hit flag is set on (step S2202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2203, and when the 5R normal big hit flag is set off (step S2202: No). ), And the process proceeds to step S2206.

<Step S2203>
When the 5R normal big hit flag is set to ON (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2203). As a result, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the game ball 99 moved from the stay lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

<Steps S2204 and S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2203), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion downward movement flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is moving downward. (Step S2204). The stopper moving down flag is referred to in step S2207 in order to determine whether or not the special out ball detection flag that is set to ON in step S2112 in the command determination process of FIG. 35 is set to ON. Then, the MPU 51 sets a down movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position (step S2205).

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 sets off a jackpot type flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that can be turned on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG.

<Step S2207>
When the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper part lowering moving flag set to on in step S2204 is set to on (step S2207). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, if the stopper unit moving-down flag is set to ON (step S2207: YES), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2208, and if the stopper unit moving-down flag is set to OFF (step S2207). : No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the stopper moving down flag is set on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set on (step S2208). The special out ball detection flag is a flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and is set to ON in step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. Here, when the special out ball detection flag is set to ON (step S2208: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out ball counter set to be stored in the RAM 512 (step S2208). If the special out ball detection flag is set to OFF (step S2208: No), the process proceeds to step S2210.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the down movement time counter set in step S2205. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downtime counter after the subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position. Here, when the value of the down motion time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2212, and when the value of the down motion time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), The game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the down movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper 383 of the game ball staying section 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and is turned on in step S2204. The stopper portion moving down flag to be set is set to OFF (step S2213). Thereby, the game ball staying part 38 is returned to a state in which the game ball 99 can stay in the stay lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the lighting state of the 7-segment display unit 39. The 7-segment display unit control process will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG.

<Step S2301>
As shown in FIG. 39, in step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag indicating that it is time to end the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is time to turn off the segment that is lit in the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, when the jackpot game effect end flag is set on (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2310, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set off (step S2301). : No), the process proceeds to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is set to off (step S2301: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the 7-segment display flag is set to on (step S2302). The 7-segment display flag is a flag indicating that any of the segments on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be lit, and is set to ON in step S2309 described later.

<Steps S2303 and S2304>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out ball counter added in step S2209 of FIG. 38 and stored in the RAM 512, and determines whether or not the value of this special out ball counter is 0 (step S2304). ). The value of the special out ball counter is a special out ball port 373 of the cruising device 37 by winning the variable winning port 316 in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode). The number of special out balls that entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S2304: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the 7-segment display unit control process because it is not necessary to light the segment of the 7-segment display unit 39. On the other hand, if the value of the special out ball counter is not 0 (step S2304: NO), the process proceeds to step S2305.

<Steps S2305 and S2306>
In step S2305, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512, and selects a control order pattern type based on this game setting value (step S2306). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects the control order pattern type according to the game setting value from the six control order pattern type selection tables (see FIGS. 40B and 40C) set for each game setting value. A table is selected, the value of the control order pattern type counter is acquired, and a control order pattern type corresponding to the value of the control order pattern type counter is selected from the control order pattern type selection table.

  Here, before explaining the control order pattern type, referring to FIG. 40 (A), the lighting state or the non-lighting state and the display numerical value of each segment A to G (see FIG. 11 (A)) in the seven segment display unit 39 Will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the control states (power supply (lighted) or shut off (lighted off)) of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 with respect to the numerical values 1 to 6 displayed as game setting values. It is shown. The player displays a number (game setting value) displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on whether the segments A to G to be controlled are in the lit state or the unlit state according to the number of special out balls. Is possible to guess. For example, when power is supplied to segment A and segment A is turned on, it is one of the game setting values 2, 3, 5, and 6 as described above, and power to segment A is cut off. When the segment A is turned off, it can be determined that the game setting value 1 or 4 is set. Similarly, for the other segments B to G, it is possible to estimate the game setting value based on whether the segment is in the lit state or the unlit state. However, as described above, the segments A to G are important in estimating the game setting value, that is, whether the game setting value alone is easy to guess, and whether the game setting value alone is high or low. The ease of playing is different, and the game setting value by combining with other segments and the ease of guessing the height are different. The game setting value can be determined more accurately by the combination of whether the plurality of segments among the segments A to G are turned on or off, and the more the number of segments to be controlled is, the more accurate it is. The game setting value can be determined, and the game setting value can be recognized when all of the at least seven segments A to G are controlled (see FIG. 11B). Further, depending on the game setting value and the control order, the game setting value can be recognized before all the seven segments A to G are controlled.

  Here, FIG. 40B is a control order pattern type selection table when the game setting value is 1, and FIG. 40C is a control order pattern type selection table when the game setting value is 1. Although the control order pattern type selection table for the game setting values 2 to 4 is omitted, the control order pattern type selection table is set for each game setting value. The control order pattern type selection table is a table for determining the priority order of which of the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 is to be turned on, and the control order pattern type counter determines the control order pattern. It is prescribed.

  In the present embodiment, seven control order patterns are defined for each game setting value. The seven control order patterns defined for each game setting value include control order patterns that make it difficult to guess the game setting value, and make it easy to select the control order pattern that makes it difficult to guess the game setting value. It is preferable. For example, when the game setting value is 1, as shown in FIG. 40B, the pattern A1 is most easily selected, then the pattern B1 is easily selected, and then the patterns C1 to E1 are easily selected, and the patterns F1 and G1 Is difficult to choose.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40A, when the game setting value is 1 and there is one control target, the segment A becomes the control target and the two game setting values are not turned on. 1 and 2 can be determined, segment B can be determined to be one of the four game setting values 1 to 4 when it is lit as a control target, and segment C is a control target It can be determined that it is one of the five game setting values 1, 3, 4 to 6 when it is lit, and the segment D is one of the two game setting values 1 and 4 when it is not lit as a controlled object. It can be determined that the segment E is one of the four game setting values 1, 3, 4 and 5 when the segment E is not lit as a control target, and the segment F is not lit as a control target Three game setting values 1-3 Can be determined to be either, segment G, it is determined game set value at a stage which is not turned on a controlled object is 1. That is, it can be determined that the segment C is one of five game setting values including the game setting value 1, and thus it is difficult to guess the game setting value. The segments B and E include four games including the game setting value 1. Since it can be determined that the set value is one of the set values, it is difficult to guess the game set value, and the priority order to be controlled tends to increase. On the other hand, since it is determined that the game setting value is 1 when the segment G is not turned on, the priority order for the segment G to be controlled is the lowest among the seven segments A to G. Since it can be determined that the segment F is one of the three game setting values including the game setting value 1, and the segments A and D are any of the two game setting values including the game setting value 1, these segments A and D , F tend to be lower in priority than segments B, C and E, but tend to be higher in priority than segment G.

  When the game setting value is 6, as expected from FIG. 40A, the priority order tends to be higher in the order of segment C, G → segment A, D → segment F → segment B, E. . When the game setting value is 6, as shown in FIG. 40C, the patterns A6 to D6 are most easily selected, the pattern E6 is then easily selected, and the patterns F6 and G6 are hardly selected. Similarly, for the game setting values 2 to 5, the control order pattern type and the selection rate thereof are appropriately determined so that the segments in which the game setting values are difficult to guess tend to have a higher priority order to be controlled.

  In this embodiment, a control order pattern type selection table is prepared for each game setting value, and the order of the segments A to G to be controlled is determined based on the control order pattern type selection table corresponding to the game setting value. However, every time the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, the segments A to G to be controlled may be selected by lottery.

<Steps S2307 to 2309>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, in step S2307, the MPU 51 determines 7 segments based on the value of the special out ball counter acquired in step S2303 and the control order pattern type selected in accordance with the game setting value in step S2308. Each segment A to G of the display unit 39 is controlled. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out ball counter (step S2308), sets the 7-segment display flag to ON (step S2309), and ends the 7-segment display unit control process.

  Here, a control example of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the game setting value is 1 and the pattern A1 (see FIG. 40B) is selected as the control order pattern will be described.

  For example, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1, the segment C is turned on by supplying power to the segment C to be controlled. In this case, the game setting value 2 is denied, and it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 2, the unlit state of the segment E to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since it cannot be determined whether or not the current control target is the segment E, it is not possible to determine whether the game setting value is 1, 4, 5, or 6 even when the turn-off state of the segment E is maintained.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 3, the segment B is turned on by supplying power to the segment B to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is three and the segments B and C are lit, the game setting values 5 and 6 are negated, and it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 3 and 4. .

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 4, the unlit state of the segment A that is the control target is maintained. In this case, since it cannot be determined whether or not the current control target is the segment A, even if the turn-off state of the segment A is maintained, it is not possible to determine whether the game setting value is 1, 3, or 4.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 5, the extinction state of the segment D to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since the segments B and C are turned on, and the three segments A and D to G of the remaining five segments A and D are turned off as control objects, the game setting in which the two segments E and F are turned off. The value 3 is negated. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is 1 or 4.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 6, the unlit state of the segment F to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since the segments B and C are turned on and the four segments out of the remaining five segments A and D to G are turned off as control targets, the three segments A, D and E are turned off. Game setting value 4 is negated. Therefore, it is determined that the game setting value is 1.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 7 or more, the unlit state of the segment G to be controlled is maintained. In this case, as in the case where the value of the special out ball counter is 6, it is determined that the game setting value is 1.

  In addition, a control example of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 when the game setting value is 6 and the pattern C6 (see FIG. 40C) is selected as the control order pattern will be described.

  For example, when the value of the special out ball counter is 1, the segment G is turned on by supplying power to the segment G to be controlled. In this case, the game setting value 1 is negated, and it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 2, the segment D is turned on by supplying power to the segment D to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is two and the segments D and G are lit, the game setting value 4 is negated and it can be determined that the game setting value is 2, 3, 5, or 6. .

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 3, the segment A is turned on by supplying power to the segment A to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is three and the segments A, D, and G are lit, it is not possible to determine whether the game setting value is 2, 3, 5, or 6.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 4, the segment C is turned on by supplying power to the segment C to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is four and the segments A, C, D, and G are lit, the game setting value 2 is negated and the game setting value is any of 3, 5, and 6. I can judge.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 5, the segment F is turned on by supplying power to the segment F to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 5 and the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit, the game setting value 3 is denied and the game setting value is either 5 or 6 I can judge.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 6, the turn-off state of the segment B to be controlled is maintained. In this case, since the number of special out balls is six and the segments A, C, D, F, and G are lit and any of the segments B and E is unlit, the game setting value is either 5 or 6. It is not possible to judge whether it is.

  When the value of the special out ball counter is 7 or more, the segment E is turned on by supplying power to the segment E to be controlled. In this case, since the number of special out balls is 7 or more and the segments A, C, D, E, F, and G are lit, it is determined that the game setting value is 6.

  As described above, based on the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2303 and the control rank pattern type selected according to the game setting value in step S2308, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. Is controlled, the corresponding segment of the seven segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 is lit based on the game setting value, the value of the special out ball counter, and the control order pattern type. Is done. Thus, the player can infer the game set value based on the number of special out balls and the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  When a plurality of segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, these segments A to G may be controlled simultaneously, or the segments A to G are controlled with a time difference according to the control order. May be. In the case where the segments A to G are simultaneously controlled, the control target segments may be turned on or off after blinking all the segments A to G or the number of control target segments corresponding to the number of special out balls. On the other hand, when a plurality of segments A to G are controlled by a time difference, the time difference is set to, for example, about 0.1 to 5 seconds, and the control is performed by blinking the segments A to G to be controlled. After clearly indicating this, the control target segments A to G may be turned on or off.

<Steps S2310 to 2312>
Returning to the description of FIG. 39, when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the segment that is lit in the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2310). Then, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment display flag indicating that the 7-segment display unit 39 is displaying on (step S2311), and further sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2312). The 7 segment display control process is terminated.

  By the way, some gaming machines have a plurality of game setting values with different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the game hall side can select a game setting value. In this case, the game hall desires to set the game set value low in order to lower the expected appearance value. When the game setting value is set to a low value, the player wants to avoid that the player stops the game by recognizing that the game setting value is low. There is a tendency to hope that it is an unknown gaming machine. In addition, there are some gaming machines that suggest or clearly indicate a game setting value by an image selected by lottery at a predetermined timing such as when a jackpot is confirmed, when a jackpot game is started, or when a jackpot game ends.

  On the other hand, in order to play a game with the gaming machine 10 with a higher expected output value, the player estimates a game setting value for a gaming machine having a game setting value (restricts to a plurality of game setting values) or I want a game that can be recognized. Thus, there is a tendency that the game hall and the player desire to conflict.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning opening 316 in a predetermined period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, the special of the clune device 37 is selected. The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball outlet 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) retained in the retention lane 381 after the lapse of a predetermined period is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled as many as the count number. To do. That is, unless the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the game is shifted to the jackpot game, the segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 are not controlled and are not lit. Therefore, unless the game is shifted to the jackpot game, the game setting value is not estimated or recognized.

  Also, it is difficult for a game ball 99 to enter the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruiser device 37. For example, 1 to 2 games per round game (about 1 game game for 10R). A game ball 99 is expected to enter. Therefore, it is difficult to guess or recognize the game setting value by the 7-segment display unit 39 in one big hit (see FIG. 40). On the other hand, for a predetermined period, the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game is ended (ending is started) after the jackpot game (opening) which is executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot is started. Until. In other words, if the first hit is a probable big hit, the normal jackpot game will be opened and closed when the normal jackpot is won, without ending as long as the jackpot villa in the high probability mode continues. Continue until the mode ends. That is, in this embodiment, while it has a gameability that it is not easy to recognize the game setting value, more games are provided to the special out-mouth 373 of the cruiser device 37 as the jackpot reaming in the high probability mode continues. The ball 99 is expected to enter, and the game setting value can be estimated more accurately. When at least seven game balls 99 are inserted into at least the special out ball opening 373, the game setting value can be reliably recognized.

  By the way, in a conventional slot machine, an image indicating a game setting value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device in which a game effect is executed. Images that suggest or explicitly indicate game setting values are displayed on, for example, jackpot confirmation screens, jackpot start screens, jackpot end screens, start screens such as ART and AT, continuation screens, and end screens. It is determined. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game setting is stepwise according to the number of specific conditions established during a predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37 during the predetermined period. Information for guessing the value is displayed, and the game setting value is difficult to guess or recognize. Therefore, the suggestion or clarification of the game setting value as in the present embodiment is a novel one that is fundamentally different from that conventionally used in gaming machines such as slot machines.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the game setting value can be estimated or confirmed, but in order to recognize the game setting value or to guess the game setting value to a plurality of game setting values, more game balls 99 is required to enter the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37, and the hurdle until the game set value can be estimated or recognized is high. Therefore, the game hall has an advantage that the game setting value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, the player has an advantage that the game setting value can be estimated or recognized. In addition, the game setting value can be estimated or recognized on the condition that the jackpot lottery is won, and the accuracy of the game setting value estimation will increase due to the continuation of the probable jackpot. Depending on the game machine 10, it is possible to give the gaming machine 10 a game property that the game setting value can be recognized. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

  Also, when the jackpot game is started, the game is terminated in the middle of the jackpot game unless there is a special circumstance, and the game is not terminated during the high probability mode in the high probability mode. Therefore, the predetermined period is a period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode, thereby preventing the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. Thus, even when a player who does not know the timing at which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized (the end of the predetermined period) advances the game, the game is played immediately before the game setting value can be estimated or recognized. Termination is prevented. Therefore, even for a player who cannot know the timing at which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized, the game setting value can be estimated or recognized. In addition, a so-called hyena action of another player who plays a game aiming at a timing at which the game setting value can be estimated or recognized can be eliminated.

  In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the first jackpot game, not only is it necessary to win at least one jackpot before the game setting value can be estimated or recognized, but even if the predetermined period is Even if it is started, as the hurdle until the game setting value can be estimated or recognized as described above is high, a considerable number of game balls 99 are fired to the game board 31 until the game setting value is estimated or recognized to some extent. A lot of big hits will be drawn. Therefore, at the stage of estimating or recognizing the game setting value with high accuracy, there is a high possibility that the number of unit jackpot lotteries (ease of receiving the jackpot lottery) has reached a stage where the judgment can be sufficiently made. Thereby, when the player can guess or recognize the game setting value with high accuracy, the player can determine the play performance of the gaming machine 10 in the game including not only the game setting value but also the number of lottery per unit jackpot. It becomes possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the game setting value is low, if the number of lottery per unit jackpot is large, it can be determined that the game will be continued in a comprehensive manner. On the other hand, even if the game setting value is high, if the number of lottery per unit jackpot is small, it can be determined that the game is abandoned after comprehensive consideration.

  In the present embodiment, when the first hit is a probable big hit, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first big hit game to the normal big hit game for the normal big hit in the high probability mode. The predetermined period may be set for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each jackpot game regardless of whether it is a first hit or a jackpot consecutive villa. In the predetermined period in this case, the start time of the jackpot game or the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the end time of the jackpot game or the opening / closing execution mode is ended. In addition, every time a predetermined period ends, the segments A to G corresponding to the number of special out balls are controlled in the 7-segment display unit 39, and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled once for each jackpot game. It may be. In this case, the lit segment of the 7-segment display unit 39 may be turned off at the end of the jackpot game. If the first hit is a promising jackpot, a normal jackpot will be won and the seven-segment display unit 39 will end until the normal jackpot game ends. The state displayed on the segment display unit 39 may be maintained. And, when setting a predetermined period for each jackpot, if the initial hit is a probable jackpot, the special status of the current jackpot is different from the display state of the 7-segment display unit 39 by the previous jackpot The number of segments corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) that have entered the out ball outlet 373 may be added as control targets. In other words, if the first hit is a promising jackpot, the special out balls from the jackpot game with respect to the first hit to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot jackpot game are accumulated for each jackpot game, and for each jackpot game. It is good also considering the segments A-G according to the number of the special out balls accumulated in the control object.

  In the present embodiment, instead of or in addition to the game setting value, part or all of other information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. As other information, for example, profit information regarding the profit state of the player in the progress of the game can be cited. As this profit information, for example, performance information indicating the performance of the balls based on the winning mouths 313 to 316 and the expected number of balls (for example, the total number of game balls launched when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched) (Ratio of expected number of balls to be paid out (number of payout game balls)) to (total number of out balls)) latent hit variation, jackpot type when lottery result in jackpot lottery is jackpot (for example, probability variation jackpot, normal Jackpots (short-time mode transition jackpots)), fall to low probability mode when the latent probability changes.

  For performance information and expected output, the ending is usually a jackpot game, the change to latency probability and low probability mode is a floating game, the jackpot type is a jackpot game, and some or all of the profit information is 7 segments. What is necessary is just to display on the display part 39. Further, when part or all of the profit information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the variable game, the profit information is obtained when a specific condition different from that of the game ball 99 entering the special out ball opening 373 is satisfied. All or all of these are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Specific conditions in this case include, for example, the fact that the number of jackpot lotteries and the number of regular lotteries reaches a specific number after the transition to the variable game. In addition, when displaying the probability change or the fall from the latent probability change to the low probability mode as profit information in the variable game, until the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the latent probability change becomes a big hit, or from the latent probability change A predetermined period of time for determining whether or not a specific condition is satisfied is the period until it falls.

  However, as profit information to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, except when it is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 when a specific condition is satisfied, rather than being able to grasp the profit state by other triggers, It is preferable that the profit state cannot be grasped. Examples of the former include, for example, the jackpot type in the lottery lottery, the latent probability change, and its fall. Examples of the latter include performance information indicating expected performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 and expected output values.

  Here, when a part or all of the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the player can, for example, individual differences or aging at the time of manufacturing the gaming machine 10 It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning ports 313 to 316 between the gaming machines due to changes or the like. Thereby, the player can guess and enjoy the ball performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316, and if the player can grasp the ball performance based on the winning ports 313 to 316, the game during the game is based on the performance information. An opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the machine 10 is given.

  Here, the performance information indicating the payout performance based on the winning openings 313 to 316 includes unit lottery lottery number information, base information, continuous character ratio information, and character ratio information.

  The number of lottery per unit is an index that indicates how easy it is to receive a lottery in the normal gaming state (in the low probability mode but not in the high frequency support mode). By being displayed on the display unit 39, it becomes possible to know the easiness of winning the big hit lottery. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the number of lottery per unit lottery, and if the number of lottery per unit jackpot can be grasped, determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine in play based on the number of lottery per unit jackpot An opportunity is given.

  Since the base information is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize to the first winning opening 314 and the general winning opening 313, the base information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 so that the first information is displayed. It becomes possible to know the ease of winning a prize to the prize winning opening 314 and the general winning prize opening 313. Thus, the player is given an opportunity to guess and enjoy the base, and when the base can be grasped, an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the base.

  The continuous winnings ratio information includes the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot gaming state (stay ratio in the jackpot gaming state), and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening 316 (in the special gaming state) It is an index that shows the amount of balls that appear. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the continuous character ratio by displaying part or all of the information related to the continuous character ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. Thus, it becomes possible to know the frequency of occurrence and the ease of winning a prize to the variable prize opening 316. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the consecutive character ratio, and if the continuous character ratio can be grasped, the player determines whether to continue the game with the gaming machine being played based on the continuous character ratio. An opportunity is given.

  The bonus rate information includes the frequency at which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state (stay rate in the jackpot game state), the stay rate in the high frequency support mode that receives support from the electric bonus 315b, and variable This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize to the winning prize opening 316 and the second winning prize opening 315 (the payout rate in the big hit gaming state). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the part ratio by displaying part or all of the information on the part ratio, so that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery shifts to the jackpot game state. It becomes possible to know the frequency, the stay ratio of the high-frequency support mode that receives the support of the electric accessory 315b, and the ease of winning a prize to the variable prize winning opening 316 and the second winning prize opening 315. As a result, the player has an opportunity to determine whether to continue the game on the gaming machine in the game based on the bonus rate when the rate of the bonus rate can be estimated and enjoyed. Is granted.

  On the other hand, when the expected output value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, in addition to the output performance based on the game setting value, the state of the nail placed on the game board 31 and the surface property of the game board 31 are considered. Can be evaluated. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance more appropriately. Moreover, you may display the expected appearance value on the 7 segment display part 39 as a fullness rate with respect to a border line.

  Further, the stopper portion 383 may be omitted, and the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball outlet 373 may be discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without being retained. In this case, the number of special out balls is counted until the predetermined period ends, and the number of segments A to G corresponding to the number of special out balls may be controlled after the predetermined period ends. Each time it is detected by 384, the segments A to G may be controlled in the order corresponding to the control order pattern type. In the former case, the predetermined period is a specific condition, but in the latter case, the game ball enters the special out ball outlet 373 (or the detection of the special out ball by the special out ball sensor 384) is a specific condition. It becomes.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing functions of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the crune device 37 having the special out ball outlet 373 that is difficult to enter and the game ball retaining portion 38 are provided in the right region of the game board 31 and the variable prize opening 316 is entered in a predetermined period. Then, on condition that a game ball enters the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37, the number of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number of special out balls in a predetermined period is controlled. As described above, a case has been described in which a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the round game in the open / close execution mode, each time a game ball exceeding the upper limit number (“9” in this embodiment) is won in the variable winning opening (so-called over winning occurs). ), Which differs from the first embodiment described above in that the segments of the 7-segment display unit are controlled in the order according to the control order pattern type. That is, the condition (specific condition) in which the segment of the 7-segment display unit is controlled is not limited to the game ball passing through a specific area such as the special out ball outlet 373.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of segments in the 7-segment display unit corresponding to the number of over winnings in a predetermined period is a control target on condition that an over winning in a variable winning opening is a condition. The crune device 37 and the game ball retaining portion 38 in the embodiment are not required. Thereby, while simplifying the configuration of the gaming machine 10, the effect of the first embodiment described above can be enjoyed.

  In addition, if an overwinning occurs, the player can obtain a profit larger than the profit obtained by winning the upper limit number of game balls in the variable winning opening, so the segment is subject to control under the condition of an overwinning. As a result, an opportunity for estimating or recognizing not only the profit as an over-winning prize but also a game set value is given, and a big profit is given to the player by the over-winning. That is, this is an example in which the possibility that the specific condition is satisfied increases as the profit obtained by the player increases. For example, the specific condition is established when a profit exceeding the expected value of the profit that is normally obtained can be obtained.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 43 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. In addition, since this embodiment has the above-described differences from the above-described first embodiment, the procedure of the command determination process, the jackpot game effect process, and the game setting value display process is different from the above-described first embodiment. Different.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002) of this embodiment, a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed by the sound lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the special ball detection command is not set because the game ball retention unit 38 is omitted, and therefore the step of determining whether or not the received command is the special ball detection command. Is omitted.

<Steps S2401 and S2402>
As shown in FIG. 41, the command determination process in the present embodiment is performed by performing the processes in steps S2101 to S2112 similar to the command determination process in the first embodiment described above, and then the MPU 51 receives the received command. It is determined whether the command is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2401). Then, when the received command is a variable winning award winning command (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning award winning flag to ON (step S2402), and ends the command determination process. On the other hand, when the received command is not a variable prize opening winning command (step S2401: No), the processing of steps S2115 to S2121 similar to the command determination processing in the first embodiment described above is executed, and the command determination processing is performed. finish.

[Big hit game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process (step S2004) of the sub timer interruption process of the present embodiment, the opening effect, the ending effect, and the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 41 are executed. Is done. Here, FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2501>
As shown in FIG. 42, in step S2501, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to ON in step S2108 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON, and the jackpot game effect is determined. If the start flag is on (step S2501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2502, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2501: No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Steps S2502 and S2503>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to off (step S2502), executes opening effect start processing (step S2503), and the jackpot game The production process ends. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the electrical decoration unit 27 to execute the opening effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 of the command determination process in FIG. An opening effect start command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to start an image effect as an opening effect is transmitted. Thereby, in the symbol display part 341, the image corresponding to an opening effect is displayed.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect start flag set to ON in step S2310 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON, and the round game effect start flag is ON. (Step S2504: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2505. If the round game start flag is off (step S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2508.

<Steps S2505 to S2507>
When the round game effect start flag is ON (step S2504: YES), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to OFF (step S2505), executes round game effect start processing (step S2506), and further rounds. The game execution flag is set to ON (step S2507), and the jackpot game effect process ends. Here, in the round game effect start process in step S2506, the MPU 51 performs the round game effect in the corresponding round in the opening / closing execution mode effect scenario determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 in the command determination process in FIG. Is executed by the speaker 26 and the electrical decoration unit 27, and a round game start command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to start an image effect as a round game effect in the corresponding round is transmitted to the display control device 6. This round game start command includes round number information indicating the number of rounds. Thereby, in the symbol display part 341, the image corresponding to the round game effect of the said round is displayed.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game effect end flag set to ON in step S2112 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON. If the round game effect end flag is on (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2509. If the round game effect end flag is off (step S2508: No), the process proceeds to step S2511. .

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
When the round game effect end flag is on (step S2508: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to off (step S2509) and sets the round game execution flag to off (step S2510). The jackpot game effect process ends.

<Step S2511>
In step S2511, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag set to on in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to on. If the ending start flag is on (step S2511: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S2512. If the ending start flag is OFF (step S2511: NO), the process proceeds to step S2514.

<Step S2512>
When the ending start flag is on (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an ending effect start process (step S2512) and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27 to execute the ending effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process in step S2107 in the command determination process of FIG. Then, an ending effect start command is transmitted to cause the symbol display unit 341 to start an image effect as an ending effect. Thereby, in the symbol display unit 341, an image corresponding to the ending basic effect is displayed.

<Step S2513>
In step S2513, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to ON, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is set to ON ( In step S2513: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2514. When the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2513: No), the jackpot game effect processing is ended.

<Steps S2514 and S2515>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2513: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2514), executes an ending effect end process (step S2515), and the jackpot game. The production process ends.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the segment A to be controlled in the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls won in the variable winning slot 316 in the round game in the open / close execution mode. ... G is turned on and off. Here, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 43, in step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to ON in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the ending effect is started by the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is set on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2602, and when the ending effect start flag is set off (step S2601: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2605.

<Step S2602>
When the ending effect start flag is set to off (step S2601: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game execution flag set to on in step S2507 of FIG. 42 is set to on. (Step S2602). In other words, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the variable winning opening 316 is open and an over winning at the variable winning opening 316 can occur. Here, when the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2603 and when the round game execution flag is set to OFF (step S2602). : No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Step S2603>
When the round game execution flag is set to ON (step S2602: YES), the MPU 51 sets the variable winning a prize winning flag set to ON in step S2402 in the command determination process of FIG. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2603). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a game ball has been won in the variable prize slot 316 based on the variable prize slot prize flag. Here, when the variable winning award winning flag is set on (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2604, and when the variable winning award winning flag is set off (step S2603). : No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2604 to S2606>
When the variable winning award winning flag is set to ON (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the variable winning award winning counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2604), and sets the variable winning award winning flag. It is set to off (step S2605). Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the variable winning award winning counter after the addition exceeds the upper limit of the number of winning game balls for closing the variable winning award opening 316 (step S2606). Here, when the value of the variable winning award winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2606, and the value of the variable winning award winning counter does not exceed the upper limit number. In the case (step S2606: No), the game setting value display process is terminated.

<Step S2607>
When the value of the variable winning opening winning counter exceeds the upper limit number (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the over winning counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2607), and the game set value display process Exit. The over-winning counter is referred to in order to determine the number of segments to be controlled in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 44 described later.

<Step S2608>
When the ending effect start flag is set on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether the 5R normal jackpot flag that can be set on in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set on. Is determined (step S2607). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is time to display a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the 5R normal big hit flag. Here, when the 5R normal big hit flag is set on (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2609, and when the 5R normal big hit flag is set off (step S2608: No). ), The game set value display process is terminated.

<Steps S2609 and S2610>
When the 5R normal big hit flag is set to ON (step S2608: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the big hit type flag (5R normal big hit flag, 5R probability variable big hit flag that can be set to ON in step S2103 of the command determination process of FIG. , 16R probability variation big hit flag) is set to OFF (step S2609). Then, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the lighting state of the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2610). The 7-segment display unit control process will be described in detail below with reference to FIG.

[7-segment display control process]
In the 7-segment display control process of the present embodiment, the game set value display of FIG. 43 is used instead of the value of the special out ball counter (see FIG. 39) of the 7-segment display control process of the first embodiment described above. Based on the value of the over-winning counter added in step S2607 in the process, the number of segments A to G to be controlled by the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2610 in the game setting value display process of FIG.

<Steps S2701 and S2702>
As shown in FIG. 44, the jackpot game effect end flag set to ON in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 41 is set to OFF (step S2301: No), and set to ON in step S2309 described later. If the segment display flag is set to ON (step S2302: NO), the value of the over-winning counter added in step S2606 is acquired (step S2701), and step S2606 in the game setting value display process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the value of the over-winning counter added at is 0 (step S2702).

<Step S2703>
When the value of the over-winning counter is 0 (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2305), and the control order pattern type selected according to this game setting value. After selecting the control rank pattern type based on the selection table (see FIGS. 40B and 40C) (step S2306), the value of the over-winning counter acquired in step S2701 and the game in step S2306 Based on the control order pattern type selected according to the set value, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled. Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the over-winning counter (step S2703), sets the 7-segment display flag to ON (step S2309), and ends the 7-segment display unit control process.

  By the way, in order to save the number of launched game balls in the interval between round games in the jackpot game, there is a so-called stop-attack technique in which the launch of the game balls in the interval is stopped. When such a stop-off is performed, the player repeatedly starts and stops the game ball while counting the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 316 in the round game. Therefore, the player gazes at the variable winning opening 316 without almost checking the symbol display unit 341 in the round game.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when an over win is generated in a round game (excluding the final round) in the open / close execution mode, an appearance performance suggestion image is displayed in the next round game of the round game in which the over win has occurred. Is done. Therefore, it becomes possible for a player who makes a stop-attack to launch an extra game ball for generating an overwinning, and to focus attention on the symbol display unit 341 in a round game. In particular, a player who makes a stop-attack has a strong tendency to place importance on the ball performance as a criterion for selecting the gaming machine 10, so in order to focus attention on the symbol display unit 341, the game setting is set in the 7-segment display unit 39 by over-winning. It is significant to display part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the values.

  In the present embodiment, when part or all of the numbers indicating the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 due to over winning, the clown device 37 and the game ball retaining unit 38 in the first embodiment described above are displayed. Can be omitted. Thereby, in this embodiment, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

  By the way, in the present embodiment, the special condition is established when a specific event occurs during the progress of a game such as an over winning of the game ball 99 to the variable winning opening 316. The specific event occurs when the player receives a profit, for example, a profit exceeding the expected value of the profit that can be normally obtained, or winning a jackpot. In other words, the greater the profit gained by the player, the higher the possibility that a specific condition will be satisfied. The special conditions established in this way include the following in addition to the game ball over winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game.

(1) When the number of jackpot games exceeds a predetermined number Since the jackpot game is to acquire the game ball 99 by entering the game ball into the variable prize opening 316, the player gets more as the number of jackpot games increases. The profit that can be earned increases. And if a specific condition is established when the number of jackpot games exceeds the predetermined number of times, not only the expectation of the jackpot games from the aspect of winning the ball, but also profits such as information on game setting values The game can be enjoyed including the expectation that information that can be estimated or recognized can be acquired.
The predetermined number of times in this case may be set as appropriate. For example, it may be determined based on, for example, a probability change rush rate or a probability change continuation rate, and may be determined as an expected value of the number of jackpots. Specifically, examples of the predetermined number of times include the average number of jackpot retreats regardless of the type of jackpot, and the average number of hit jackpots when the first hit is a probable big hit. In this embodiment, the probability ratio of the jackpot is 75%, and the ratio of the jackpot is usually 25% (see FIG. 14C). The predetermined number of times is 4 times, and when the initial hit is a probable big jackpot, the average number of consecutive jackpots (predetermined number of times) is 5.
The predetermined number of times may be one. That is, a specific condition may be satisfied each time the jackpot ream continuation continues.
In addition, when the predetermined number of times is not once, the specific condition after the first specific condition is satisfied may be satisfied when the predetermined number of jackpot villas continues, or the first specific condition may be satisfied. This condition may be satisfied when a specific number of times (for example, one time) of big hit consecutive villas continues from the predetermined number of times when the above condition is satisfied.

(2) When the number of balls in the jackpot reaming game exceeds the predetermined number of balls Since the jackpot game is to acquire the game ball 99 by entering the game ball into the variable game port 316, the game goes to the variable game port 316. The greater the number of game balls entered, the greater the profit that the player can acquire. And if the specific condition is satisfied when the number of balls in the jackpot retreat exceeds the predetermined number of balls, not only the expectation of the jackpot retreat from the aspect of winning the ball, but also the game setting value It is possible to enjoy the game including the expectation that it is possible to acquire information that can be estimated or recognized profit information such as information related to.
In this case, the predetermined number of balls may be set as appropriate. For example, the probability change entry rate, the probability change continuation rate, the round number distribution, the number of winning balls of the variable winning opening 316, the upper limit number (count number) at which the variable winning opening 316 is closed. It is determined based on the above, and may be determined as an expected value of the number of balls in the jackpot series.
The expected value of the number of balls in the jackpot renso may be either a ball expected value regardless of the jackpot type, or a ball expected value when the initial hit is a probable big hit.
It should be noted that, instead of the number of balls in the jackpot renja, a specific condition may be established when the number of balls in the jackpot renja exceeds a predetermined number.

(3) When the number of balls in the high probability mode exceeds a predetermined number of balls The high probability mode not only has a high probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, but also whether or not the electric accessory 315b is operated. There is a high probability that the lottery result in the lottery per day will win. Therefore, in the high probability mode, it is possible to allow a large number of game balls 99 to enter the second winning opening 315 by operating the electric accessory 315b at a high frequency according to the usual figure. Therefore, the longer the stay period in the high probability mode (the greater the number of lotteries per lottery per drawing), the larger the number of game balls 99 that can be acquired in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the player has a tendency to dislike humming in the high probability mode and desire to win a jackpot lottery in a short stay period in the high probability mode. And if a specific condition is established when the number of balls in the high probability mode exceeds a predetermined number of balls, profit information such as information related to game setting values etc. is estimated or recognized by the humiliation in the high probability mode The possibility of acquiring possible information increases. Therefore, even a player who dislikes humiliation in the high-probability mode can obtain a profit different from the acquisition of the game ball 99 by humiliation, so the disgust with respect to hamari is alleviated.
In this case, the predetermined number of balls may be set as appropriate. For example, the jackpot probability in the high probability mode (average number of lotteries in the jackpot), the probability per base, the number of winning balls and the opening time of the second winning opening 315, etc. And an expected appearance value calculated from an average value of the number of jackpot lotteries (number of jackpot games) required to win the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode.
However, the specific condition is set when the number of balls in the high probability mode exceeds the predetermined number of balls when the game ball 99 is continuously launched without using a special technique such as stop hitting. It is preferable to apply when the expected appearance value calculated from the average value of the number of games of jackpots is positive (when the number of balls is increased in the game of jackpots). Typically, a small lottery that allows a small amount of game balls to be acquired in the high probability mode, and a gaming machine 10 that wins the small lottery with a high probability, or a small amount of games with a high probability in the big lottery The present invention is applied to the gaming machine 10 that wins a small hit with which a ball can be acquired. In addition, it is conceivable that the small win can be selected with a high probability in a limited manner in a high probability mode that shifts after the end of a specific type of probable big hit game such as a 16R probable big win.
Note that, instead of the number of balls in the high probability mode, a specific condition may be established when the number of balls in the high probability mode exceeds a predetermined number of balls.
In addition, in the gaming machine 10 that wins with a high probability per jackpot in the high probability mode, a specific condition may be satisfied each time the number of jackpots in the jackpot game reaches a predetermined number. The predetermined number of times in this case may be set as appropriate. For example, the number of small hits in the high probability mode is determined based on, for example, the jackpot probability in the high probability mode (average number of lotteries in the jackpot), the small hit probability, etc. Can be considered.

(4) When the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is a combination of specific symbols The lottery result in the big win lottery is notified or suggested by the combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 The For example, in the present embodiment, the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined when the number is 7 and the probability variation jackpot of either 16R probability variation or 5R probability variation is determined when the number is 3, and 3 and 7 In addition, when it is a flat eye, either the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is determined, and when it is a non-spotted break, a disengagement is determined. That is, the combination of main symbols that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 suggests or clearly indicates the amount of profit that the player can acquire. Therefore, as a special condition, the combination of main symbols that can be acquired by the player is large. It is also conceivable to set to stop display (for example, 3 or 7 doublet).

  In the present embodiment, design changes similar to those in the first embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a special out ball in a predetermined period is provided on the condition that a ball is entered into the variable prize opening 316 in a predetermined period and a game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37. The case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number as the control target has been described. .

  On the other hand, this embodiment is common to the first embodiment described above in that the game setting value is suggested or specified on the condition that a game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 373 during a predetermined period. The game setting value is different from the first embodiment in that the game setting value is suggested or clearly indicated as an alphabet in the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, profit information such as game setting values set on the game hall side can be configured not to be directly displayed by numerical values but to be indirectly displayed by alphabets or the like.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game setting values are indirectly displayed using alphabets, thereby making it difficult for the player to guess or recognize the game setting values as compared to the first embodiment. Is possible. Thereby, it can prevent that a game setting value is guessed or recognized at an early stage by a player, As a result, the fall of the operating rate of a game machine can be suppressed.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the alphabets displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 of the gaming machine according to this embodiment and game setting values, and FIG. 45 (B) is the 7-segment display unit. It is a figure which shows the correspondence of the lighting or light extinction state of each segment, and a display alphabet. In FIG. 45B, the parenthesis on the right side of the alphabet indicates a game set value.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the number of over-winning game balls generated at the variable winning opening 316 in a predetermined period is 7 or more, and when the game setting value is 1, the segments A to C, E to The letter A is displayed when G is lit, the letter B is displayed when all segments A to G are lit when the game setting value is 2, and the segment is set when the game setting value is 3. When letters A and D to F are turned on, the letter C is displayed. When the game setting value is 4, the letters A and F are turned on when the segments A to F are turned on and the game setting value is 5. When the segments D to G are turned on, the alphabet E is displayed. When the game setting value is 6, the segments A and E to G are turned on to display the alphabet F.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (B), the control states (power supply (lighted) or shut off (lighted off)) of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 for the alphabets A to F displayed as game setting values. It is shown. The player can display the alphabet (game setting value) displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on whether the segments A to G to be controlled are in the lit state or the unlit state according to the number of special out balls. Is possible to guess. For example, when power is supplied to segment A and segment A is turned on, it is one of alphabets A to F (game setting values 1 to 6), power to segment A is cut off, and segment A Since there is no alphabet (game setting value) corresponding to the turn-off state, the alphabet (game setting value) cannot be determined from being turned on or off by segment A alone. Similarly, in the case of segments E and F alone, the alphabet (game setting value) cannot be determined from lighting or extinguishing. On the other hand, when power is supplied to segment B and segment B is turned on, it can be determined that it is one of alphabets A, B, and D (game setting values 1, 2, and 4). Is cut off and the segment B is turned off, so that it can be determined that it is one of the alphabets C, E, and F (game setting values 3, 5, and 6). Similarly, in the case of segments C, D, and G alone, it is possible to guess (narrow down) the alphabet (game setting value) from lighting or extinguishing. And the game setting value displayed as an alphabet can be judged more correctly depending on whether the plurality of segments A to G are turned on or off, and the number of segments to be controlled is large. The game setting value can be determined more accurately, and the game setting value can be recognized when all of the at least seven segments A to G are controlled. Further, depending on the game setting value and the control order, the game setting value can be recognized before all the seven segments A to G are controlled.

  Thus, even when the game setting values are displayed in alphabet on the 7-segment display unit 39, as in the case where the game setting values are displayed numerically as in the first embodiment, for example, the game setting value alone is set. The ease of guessing the value itself and the ease of judging the level of the game setting value alone are different, and the game setting value by combining with other segments and the ease of guessing the level differ. Therefore, the ease of guessing the game setting value differs depending on the order in which the segments are to be controlled. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in the order according to a pattern selected from a plurality of control order patterns predetermined for each game setting value. (See FIGS. 46A and 46B).

  Here, FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a control order pattern type selection table used in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. Specifically, FIG. 46A is a control order pattern type selection table in the case of the game setting value 1, and FIG. 46B is a control order pattern type selection table in the case of the game setting value 1. Although the control order pattern type selection tables for the game setting values 2 to 4 are omitted, as shown in FIGS. 46 (A) and 46 (B), seven control order pattern type selection tables are set for each game setting value. Has been. This control order pattern type selection table is a table for determining the priority order of which of the segments A to G in the 7-segment display unit 39 is to be lit, and is controlled by the control order pattern type counter. Is stipulated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46A, when the game setting value is 1, when the control target up to the third stage is a combination of segments A, E, and F as in patterns A1 to F1 Even if the segments A, E, and F are turned on, it cannot be determined which of the game setting values is 1 to 6.

  In addition, when the control target is the segment G and the segment G is turned on in the fourth stage, that is, when the segments A, E, F, and G are turned on, the alphabet F is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 2, 5, and 6. When the control target is segment D in the fifth stage, since the segment D is not turned on (because the extinguished state is maintained), the game setting value is still narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, 6 Can not.

  In addition, when the control target is the segment B or C and the segment B or C is turned on in the sixth stage, the estimated alphabet is A or B, so that the game setting value can be determined to be 1 or 2. . When the control target is the segment B or C in the seventh stage and the segment B or C is lit, it can be recognized that the alphabet A is completed and the game setting value is 1.

  On the other hand, in the pattern G1 when the game setting value is 1, when the control target is the segment G and the segment G is lit in the first stage, it is one of the alphabets A, B, E, and F. It can be determined that the set value is any one of 1, 2, 5, and 6. In addition, when the segments A, E, and F are controlled and the segments A, E, and F are turned on in the second to fourth stages, the game setting values are still narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, and 6. Can not.

  When the control target is segment D in the fifth stage, since the segment D is not turned on (because the extinguished state is maintained), the game setting value is still narrowed down from 1, 2, 5, 6 Can not. However, since there is no non-lit segment in alphabet B, 2 is denied as a game setting value because it is not alphabet B at the stage where four segments A and E to G are lit in the fifth stage. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is one of 1, 5, and 6.

  In addition, when the control target is the segment B or C in the sixth stage and the segment B or C is turned on, since the game setting values 5 and 6 are negated because it is not the alphabet E or F, 7 It can be recognized that the game setting value is 1 before the segment at the stage is controlled.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (B), when the game setting value is 6, unlike the case of the game setting value 1, the priorities of the segments B, C, and D are in the same column. This is because the segments B, C, and D are not lit when they are controlled, so that the game setting values are narrowed down regardless of the order of control of the segments B, C, and D. Because you can.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, some or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a number, it is easy for the player to guess the game set value, so there is a concern that the interest in the game will be reduced early, and the game set value is low. There is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 may decrease.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, part or all of the alphabet corresponding to the game setting value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, compared with the case where some or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the game setting value, so that the interest in the game is early. And the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 having a low game set value is suppressed.

  In addition, when making a game setting value respond | correspond to an alphabet, it is not necessary to make it respond | correspond to AF, and you may make it respond | correspond to another alphabet. One game setting value may correspond to a plurality of alphabets. For example, the game setting value 1 may correspond to alphabets A and G, and the game setting values 2 to 6 may be similarly selected from a plurality of alphabets. Further, instead of the alphabet, game setting values may be associated with symbols. In addition, the game setting values may correspond to alphabets, numbers, and symbols. For example, when the game setting value is 1, either the number 1 or the alphabet A may be selected, and the game setting values 2 to 6 may be similarly selected from the corresponding alphabet and number. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made within the applicable range.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a special out for a predetermined period is provided on the condition that a game ball 99 enters the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37 after entering the variable prize opening 316 in a predetermined period. A case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number of balls as control targets will be described. did.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that a game ball enters the special out ball outlet during a predetermined period, the game setting indicating the game set value according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. A value display face image (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “face image”) is different from the first embodiment in that it is displayed on the symbol display section. That is, the profit information related to the game setting value or the like is not limited to the case where it is displayed on the 7-segment display unit, and may be displayed on a display device of another form such as a liquid crystal display device, and is configured by a plurality of parts. It can also be configured to be indirectly displayed as an image such as a face image.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game setting value is displayed as a face image on the symbol display unit, so that it is not necessary to provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, the effect of the first embodiment described above can be enjoyed while simplifying the configuration of the gaming machine 10. Further, the game setting value is indirectly displayed by the face image composed of a plurality of parts, so that the player can guess or recognize the game setting value earlier than in the first embodiment described above. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 54, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since the present embodiment has the above-described differences from the first embodiment, the game setting value display mode and the game setting value display processing procedure are different from those of the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 47A is a diagram illustrating an example of an ending screen in the jackpot game in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 47 (A), in the present embodiment, the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed up to the step corresponding to the number of special out balls on the ending screen in the normal jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the entire face image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the face image is displayed in steps in steps 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 48 to 52). Here, part or all of the face image is displayed on the ending screen in the normal jackpot game, as described in the first embodiment, usually at the end of the predetermined period in which the number of special out balls is retained. This is because it is reasonable to display a part or all of the face image on the ending screen with the normal jackpot when setting at the end of the jackpot opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, FIG. 47B is a diagram illustrating an example of the game setting value display face image display order (correspondence between the number of special out balls and the display part). As shown in FIG. 47 (B), the face image is displayed in seven stages from Step 1 to Step 7, and the entire face image is displayed in Step 7 as described above. In Steps 1 to 6, a part of the face image is displayed. Displayed in stages. Step 1 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is one. In step 1, the contour of the face image is displayed. Step 2 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is two. In Step 2, the ear of the face image is displayed. Step 3 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is three. In step 3, the nose of the face image is displayed. Step 4 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is four. In step 4, the mouth of the face image is displayed. Step 5 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is five. In step 5, the hair (the presence or absence of a hat) of the face image is displayed. Step 6 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is six. In step 6, the eyebrows in the face image are displayed. Step 7 corresponds to the case where the number of special out balls in the predetermined period is 7 or more. In Step 7, the eyes of the face image are displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the parts of the face image are sequentially displayed step by step in a fixed order according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball outlet 373. Note that the display contents in steps 1 to 3 are common to all game setting values, and it is impossible to determine which of the game setting values is 1 to 6 until step 3. On the other hand, in Steps 4-7, the parts of the face image are displayed with the display content selected according to the game setting value among the plurality of display content. Specifically, as described later, in step 4, the face image is displayed as either a mouth open or closed one, and in step 5, a face image with only hair added or a face image with a hair added with a hat is displayed. In step 6, the eyebrows are displayed as either hanging or hanging, and in step 7, the eyes are displayed as either opened or closed. In steps 4 to 7, the mouth, the hair, the eyebrows, and the eyes are displayed with display contents selected from two types of display contents, but the display contents that can be selected may be other than two types. The number of display contents that can be selected in 4 to 7 need not be the same.

  Here, FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between game setting values and face images. As shown in FIG. 48, 16 face images A to P having the same outline, ears and nose, and different at least one of mouth, hair (with or without hat), eyebrows and eyes are set. A plurality of face images are associated with each setting value. Specifically, the face images A to C are associated with the game setting value 1, the face images D to F are associated with the game setting value 2, and the face image G is associated with the game setting value 3. ~ I are associated with each other, face images J and K are associated with the game setting value 4, face images L and M are associated with the game setting value 5, and the game setting value 6 is Are associated with face images N to P.

  Here, FIGS. 49 to 52 are diagrams illustrating examples of display patterns of face images.

  As shown in FIGS. 49 to 52, when the number of special out balls is one (step 1), an image representing the outline of the face is displayed on the normal jackpot ending screen of the symbol display unit 341. When the number of special out balls is two (step 2), an image representing the ear is displayed on the normal jackpot ending screen of the symbol display unit 341 in addition to the image representing the outline of the face. When the number of special out balls is three (step 3), an image representing the nose is displayed on the normal jackpot ending screen of the symbol display unit 341 in addition to the image representing the face outline and ear. As described above, the steps 1 to 3 are common to all the 16 face images A to P.

  When the number of special out balls is four (step 4), a face image with a mouth added to the image of step 3 is displayed. The mouth is displayed as either open or closed. In the case of a face image with an open mouth added in step 4 (see FIGS. 49 and 50), it is one of the face images A, B, D, I, J, L, N, and O. At this stage, a game It cannot be determined whether the set value is 1 to 6. On the other hand, in the case of a face image with a closed mouth added in step 4 (see FIGS. 51 and 52), it is one of the face images C, E, F, G, H, K, M, P. Then, it cannot be determined which of the game setting values is 1-6.

  When the number of special out balls is 5 (step 5), a face image in which only the hair is added to the image in step 4 or a face image in which a hat is added together with the hair is displayed. If the mouth is open in the case of the face image in which only the hair is added in step 5 (see FIG. 49), it is one of the face images A, B, L and N, and the game setting values 2, 3 and 4 are Since the result is negative, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1, 5, and 6. In the case of the face image in which only the hair is added in step 5, when the mouth is closed and opened (see FIG. 51), it is one of the face images E, G, K and P, and the game setting values 1 and 5 are Since it is denied, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2 to 4 and 6. If the mouth is open in the case of the face image in which the hat is added together with the hair in step 5 (see FIG. 50), it is one of the face images D, J, M and O, and the game setting values 1 and 3 are negative. Therefore, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 2, 4 to 6. In the case of the face image in which the hat is added together with the hair in step 5, if the mouth is closed and open (see FIG. 52), it is one of the face images C, F, H and I, and the game setting values 4 to 6 Is denied, it can be determined that the game setting value is any one of 1-3.

  When the number of special out balls is six (step 6), a face image in which eyebrows are added to the image of step 5 is displayed. The eyebrows are displayed as either a raised one or a hanging one. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows suspended in step 6 are added, when the mouth is open and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 49), it is one of the face images A and N, and the game setting value is 1 and 6 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows hanging down in step 6 are added, when the mouth is open and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 49), it is one of the face images B and L, and the game setting values are 1 and 5 It can be judged that either. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows that are lifted in step 6 are added, if the mouth is open and the hat is worn (see FIG. 50), it is one of the face images O and M, and the game setting value is 5 and 6 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows that hang down are added in step 6, when the mouth is open and the hat is put on (see FIG. 50), it is one of the face images D and J, and the game setting values are 2 and 4 It can be judged that either. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows that are lifted in step 6 are added, when the mouth is closed and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 51), it is one of the face images E and P, and the game setting value is 2 and 6 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows hanging down in step 6 are added, when the mouth is closed and the hat is not worn (see FIG. 51), it is one of the face images G and K, and the game setting values are 3 and 4 It can be judged that either. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows suspended in step 6 are added, when the mouth is closed and the hat is put on (see FIG. 52), it is one of the face images C and H, and the game setting value is 1 and 3 can be determined. In the case of the face image to which the eyebrows that hang down are added in step 6, when the mouth is closed and the hat is put on (see FIG. 52), it is one of the face images F and I, and the game setting values are 2 and 3 It can be judged that either.

  When the number of special out balls is 7 or more (step 7), a face image obtained by adding eyes to the image of step 6 is displayed. The eyes are displayed as either open or closed. Then, a face image is completed by adding eyes, and it can be determined which of the face images AP. Thereby, the player can recognize the game setting value.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the present embodiment, in the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball staying part 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, control is executed in which a part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal jackpot ending. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 53, in the game setting value display process of this embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the upper and lower portions of the stopper 383 of the game ball staying portion 38 are moved up and down. Movement is controlled. In step S2801, face image display processing for displaying a part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is executed. Hereinafter, the face image display process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

[Face image display processing]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the face image display process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG.

<Step S2901>
As shown in FIG. 54, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the face image display flag is set to ON. The face image display flag is a flag indicating that part or all of the face image is displayed, and is set to ON in step S2909 described later. Here, when the face image display flag is set on (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the face image display processing, and when the face image display flag is set off (step S2901). S2901: No), the process proceeds to step S2902.

<Steps S2902 and S2903>
In step S2902, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out ball counter added in step S2209 of FIG. 38 and stored in the RAM 512, and determines whether or not the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S2903). ). The value of the special out ball counter is a special out ball port 373 of the cruising device 37 by winning the variable winning port 316 in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode). The number of special out balls that entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the face image display process. On the other hand, when the value of the special out ball counter is not 0 (step S2903: No), the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Steps S2904 to S2906>
In step S2904, the MPU 51 calculates the number of face image display steps based on the value of the special out-ball counter (number of special out-balls) acquired in step S2902. That is, the MPU 51 determines to what level the face image is displayed. Then, the MPU 51 acquires the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S2905), and selects a face image type based on this game setting value (step S2906). Specifically, the MPU 51 selects a face image from the face images A to C when the game setting value is 1, selects a face image from the face images D to F when the game setting value is 2, and sets the game When the value is 3, the face image is selected from the face images G to I, when the game setting value is 4, the face image is selected from the face images J and K, and when the game setting value is 5, the face image L and A face image is selected from M, and when the game setting value is 6, a face image is selected from the face images N to P (see FIG. 48).

<Steps S2907 to 2309>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 transmits a face image display command indicating the face image type determined in step S2906 and the number of face image display steps calculated in step S2904 to the display control device 6. As a result, the display control device 6 displays part or all of the face image up to a stage corresponding to the number of face image display steps calculated in step S2904 on the normal jackpot ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Let Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 (step S2908), sets the face image display flag to OFF (step S2909), and ends the face image display processing.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, some or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a number, it is easy for the player to guess the game set value, so there is a concern that the interest in the game will be reduced early, and the game set value is low. There is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 may decrease.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part or all of the face image corresponding to the game setting value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, compared with the case where some or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the game setting value, so that the interest in the game is early. And the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 having a low game set value is suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, since the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is provided, and the control becomes easier than when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled.

  In this embodiment, a part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal jackpot game ending, but the image indicating the game setting value is displayed. Are not limited to face images, and may be other images. For example, the game setting values may be indicated by images such as whole body images, animals, symbols, symbol strings, characters, character strings, numbers, and numeric strings. For example, the game setting value may be indicated by a numerical image as shown in FIG. 55, or the game setting value may be indicated by an alphabet image as shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 55, instead of displaying the number indicating the game setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above, a part or all of the number image indicating the game setting value on the ending screen Is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 56, instead of displaying the alphabet indicating the game setting value on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the third embodiment described above, part or all of the alphabet image indicating the game setting value on the ending screen Is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball that has won the variable winning opening 316 enters the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37, it is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to a stage according to the number of the balls. A part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen to be displayed on condition that an over winning is generated at the variable winning opening 316 as in the third embodiment described above. A part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value may be displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to a stage corresponding to the number of over winnings.

  In addition, within the applicable range, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a special out ball in a predetermined period is provided on the condition that a ball is entered into the variable prize opening 316 in a predetermined period and a game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37. The case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number as the control target has been described. .

  In addition, on the condition that a game ball enters the special out ball outlet 373 in a predetermined period, a face image indicating the game set value is displayed in the symbol display unit according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. The case where it is displayed on 341 has been described.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, on the condition that a game ball enters the special out ball outlet 373 in a predetermined period, it is displayed on the symbol display unit according to the game set value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. This is different from the first embodiment described above in that the number of game setting value display images that can be estimated or recognized is set. That is, profit information such as information on game setting values is not limited to being displayed by a method in which display content is increased (added), but in a method in which display content (game setting value candidates) is decreased (deleted). It may be displayed.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game setting value is displayed on the symbol display unit, so that it is not necessary to provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment. Thereby, like the above-mentioned 4th Embodiment, the effect of the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment can be enjoyed, simplifying the structure of a gaming machine. In addition, when game setting values are displayed in a manner in which display contents (game setting value candidates) are reduced (deleted), control of image display on the symbol display unit is simplified compared to the fourth embodiment described above. There is an advantage of being.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60, focusing on the differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since the present embodiment has the above-described differences from the first embodiment, the game setting value display mode and the game setting value display processing procedure are different from those of the first embodiment.

  Here, FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing an ending screen in the normal jackpot game in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 57 (A), in this embodiment, a game setting value image of steps corresponding to the game setting value and the number of special out balls is displayed on the ending screen in the normal jackpot game. In the present embodiment, a game setting value image is displayed in which the game setting value can be recognized in step 6 where the number of special out balls is 5, and the game setting value is displayed in steps 1 to 5 where the number of special out balls is 0 to 4. The game setting value image that can be estimated is displayed stepwise, and the game setting value becomes easier to estimate as the number of steps (number of special out balls) increases (see FIG. 58).

  Specifically, the game setting value image is divided into six areas, and in step 1 (the number of special out balls is 0), a marine life image corresponding to the game setting value is displayed in each area. Each marine life image is given a number, and this number corresponds to the game setting value. Specifically, the marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 1 is an octopus displayed in the upper left area. A marine life image corresponding to a game setting value of 2 is a harisenbon displayed in the middle upper region. A marine life image corresponding to a game setting value of 3 is a turtle displayed in the upper right area. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 4 is a shark displayed in the lower left area. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 5 is shrimp displayed in the middle and lower area. The marine life image corresponding to the game setting value of 6 is an angler displayed in the lower right area.

  In addition, in the game set value image, it is difficult to visually recognize the marine life images in the number of areas corresponding to the number of special out balls (see FIG. 58). For example, when the number of special out balls is 0 (step 1), all six marine life images are easily visible. On the other hand, when the number of special out balls is 1 (step 2), it is difficult to visually recognize one marine life image (5 marine life images are easy to visually recognize). You will guess the value. When the number of special out balls is two (step 3), it is difficult to view two marine life images (four marine life images are easy to see), and the actual set value is estimated from the four game set values. become. When the number of special out balls is three (step 4), it is difficult to view three marine life images (three marine life images are easy to see), and the actual set value is estimated from the three game set values. become. When the number of special out balls is four (step 5), it is difficult to view four marine life images (two marine life images are easy to see), and the actual set value is estimated from the two game set values. become. When the number of special out balls is five (step 6), it is difficult to view five marine life images (one marine life image is easy to see), and the game setting value can be recognized.

  Here, FIG. 57B is a diagram showing an example of the image erasure order (correspondence relationship between the number of steps (number of special out balls) and the erased image (image that is difficult to view)).

  As shown in FIG. 57 (B), the image erasure order is defined for each game setting value, and the marine life image corresponding to the game setting value is not to be erased. Further, the marine life image that is finally erased in step 6 is the marine life image having the highest game setting value. That is, in the game setting values 1 to 5, the marine life image that is finally erased is an angle corresponding to the game setting value 6, and in the game setting value 6, the marine life image that is finally erased is the game setting value 5. Corresponding octopus. Thereby, since the marine life image corresponding to the highest setting value can be left in the process up to the final step 6, the player expects the gaming setting value of the gaming machine 10 to be the highest setting value. Can enjoy.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), for example, in the case of step 1 where the number of special out balls is 0, all (6) marine life images are displayed as game setting value images. It will be a thing. In the case of step 2 with one special out ball number, when the game setting value is 1, the game setting value 3 is denied because the turtle corresponding to the game setting value 3 is difficult to see, and the game setting value is 1. 2, 4 to 6, and when the game setting value is 6, the game setting value 2 is denied because it is difficult to visually recognize the harisenbon corresponding to the game setting value 2, and the game setting value Can be determined to be any one of 1, 3-6. In the case of Step 3 with two special out balls, if the game setting value is 1, the game setting value 4 is further denied because the shark corresponding to the game setting value 4 is difficult to see, and the game setting value is The game setting value 3 is further denied when the game setting value is 6 and the turtle corresponding to the game setting value 3 is difficult to visually recognize. It can be determined that the set value is any one of 1, 4 to 6. In the case of step 4 where the number of special out balls is three, when the game setting value is 1, the game setting value 2 is further negated because it is difficult to visually recognize the harisenbon corresponding to the game setting value 2, and the game setting value is 1, 5, and 6, and when the game setting value is 6, the game setting value 4 is further denied because the shark corresponding to the game setting value 4 is difficult to visually recognize. Can be determined to be any one of 1, 5, and 6. In the case of step 5 where the number of special out balls is 4, when the game setting value is 1, the game setting value 5 is further denied because the shrimp corresponding to the game setting value 5 is difficult to visually recognize, and the game setting value is If the game setting value is 6 and the shrimp corresponding to the game setting value 5 is difficult to see, the game setting value 5 is further denied, and the game setting value is 1 And 6 can be determined. In the case of step 6 where the number of special out balls is 5 or more, when the game setting value is 1, the game setting value 6 is further denied because the angler corresponding to the game setting value 6 is difficult to visually recognize, and the game setting value Can be recognized as 1, and when the game setting value is 6, the octopus corresponding to the game setting value 1 is made difficult to visually recognize, so that the game setting value 6 is further denied and the game setting value is recognized as 1. it can.

[Game setting value display processing]
In the present embodiment, in the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball staying part 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment described above. In the present embodiment, control is performed in which part or all of the game setting value image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal jackpot ending. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 59, in the game set value display process of this embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the upper and lower portions of the stopper 383 of the game ball staying section 38 are moved up and down. Movement is controlled. In step S3001, a game setting value image display process for displaying a game setting value image indicating a game setting value is executed. Hereinafter, the game setting value image display processing will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

[Game setting value image display processing]
Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value image display process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG.

<Step S3101>
As shown in FIG. 60, in step S3101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game setting value image display flag is set to ON. The game setting value image display flag is a flag indicating that a game setting value image is displayed, and is set to ON in step S3109 described later. Here, when the setting image display flag is set to ON (step S3101: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game setting value image display processing, and the game setting value image display flag is set to OFF. If it is present (step S3101: No), the process proceeds to step S3102.

<Steps S3102 and S3103>
In step S3102, the MPU 51 acquires the value of the special out ball counter added in step S2209 of FIG. 38 and stored in the RAM 512, and determines whether or not the value of this special out ball counter is 0 (step S3103). ). The value of the special out ball counter is a special out ball port 373 of the cruising device 37 by winning the variable winning port 316 in a predetermined period (a period from the start of the first jackpot game to the end of the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode). The number of special out balls that entered the ball. Then, when the value of the special out ball counter is 0 (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game set value image display process. On the other hand, when the value of the special out ball counter is not 0 (step S3103: No), the process proceeds to step S3104.

<Steps S3104 to S3106>
In step S3104, the MPU 51 calculates a number (step number) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the marine life image, based on the value of the special out ball counter (number of special out balls) acquired in step S3102. Then, the MPU 51 obtains the game setting value stored in the RAM 512 (step S3105), and selects the image erasing order based on the image erasing order table (see FIG. 57B) according to this game setting value (see FIG. 57B). Step S3106). Specifically, when the game setting value is 1, the MPU 51 selects “No erasure” → “Turtle” → “Shark” → “Harisenbon” → “Shrimp” → “Uncook” If the setting value is 2, select “No erasure” → “Turtle” → “Shark” → “Shrimp” → “Octopus” → “Ancho”. If the game setting value is 3, “No erasure” → “Harisenbon” ”→” Shark ”→“ Shrimp ”→“ Octopus ”→“ Ancho ”When the game setting value is 4,“ No erasure ”→“ Harisenbon ”→“ Turtle ”→“ Shrimp ”→“ Octopus ”→ When “Uncho” is selected and the game setting value is 5, “No erasure” → “Harisenbon” → “Turtle” → “Shark” → “Octopus” → “Ancho” and the game setting value is 6 Select “No Erase” → “Harisenbon” → “Turtle” → “Shark” → “Octopus” → “Shrimp” That.

<Steps S3107 to 2309>
In step S3107, the MPU 51 transmits a game setting value image display command indicating the image deletion order determined in step S3106 and the number of steps calculated in step S3104 to the display control device 6. Thereby, the display control device 6 displays the game setting value image in which the marine life image is difficult to view until the stage corresponding to the number of steps calculated in step S3104 on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341. . Then, the MPU 51 clears the value of the special out ball counter stored in the RAM 512 (step S3108), sets the game setting value image display flag to OFF (step S3109), and ends the game setting value image display processing. To do.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, some or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game setting value is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display unit 39, the 7-segment display unit 39 for displaying a number corresponding to the game setting value is required.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a part or all of a plurality of marine life images corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. Therefore, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is provided, and the control becomes easier than when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled.

  In the present embodiment, a game setting value image with a number is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal jackpot game ending, but the game setting value image has a number omitted. It may be replaced with an alphabet, a symbol, or the like instead of a number.

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball that has won the variable winning opening 316 enters the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37, it is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to a stage according to the number of the balls. The marine life image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen to be displayed. However, as in the third embodiment described above, the number of over winnings is obtained on condition that an over winning is generated at the variable winning opening 316. The number of marine life images corresponding to the number may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  In addition, within the applicable range, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a special out ball in a predetermined period is provided on the condition that a ball is entered into the variable prize opening 316 in a predetermined period and a game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 373 of the croon device 37. The case where a part or all of the numerical values corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by controlling the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 corresponding to the number as the control target has been described. .

  In the above-described fourth embodiment, the game setting is made according to the game setting value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period on condition that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball outlet 373 in the predetermined period. The case where the game setting value display face image indicating the value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, on the condition that a game ball enters the special out ball outlet 373 in a predetermined period, the expected output value is determined according to the expected output value and the number of special out balls in the predetermined period. This is different from the first and fourth embodiments described above in that the expected appearance face image (hereinafter, simply referred to as “face image”) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. That is, the profit information displayed on the display device such as the symbol display unit is not limited to information related to the game setting value, but may be other information such as information related to the expected appearance value.

  And in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the information regarding the expected appearance value is displayed on the symbol display unit, so that the information regarding the game setting value is displayed as in the first embodiment described above. In addition to the ball performance based on the game setting value, the ball performance considering the state of the nail placed on the game board 31 and the surface property of the game board 31 can be comprehensively evaluated. Thereby, while enjoying the enjoyment of guessing the game setting value, it is possible to guess and enjoy the overall appearance performance of the gaming machine 10. In addition, since the game setting value cannot be recognized, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced early, and to reduce the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 having a low game setting value.

  Here, the expected output value is, for example, the expected number of balls (paid game balls) with respect to the total number of game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). Expected number of balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) is equal to the expected number of balls (number of game balls to be paid out). The number is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and is less than 100% when the expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) is smaller. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the expected appearance value exceeds 100%, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the appearance performance. On the other hand, when the expected appearance value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous for the player, and the lower the value, the lower the appearance performance.

  In addition, the expected number of balls to be played (the number of payout game balls) is the normal gaming state (low probability mode and non-high frequency support mode), short-time gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode), probability variation gaming state (high It can be calculated from the theoretical ratio of the probability mode and the high frequency support mode) and the jackpot gaming state and the theoretical number of balls in each gaming state. Here, the theoretical ratio of each gaming state is, for example, a game setting value (a jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode (see FIGS. 7A and 7B)), a jackpot type allocation rate ( It is calculated on the basis of the number of lottery per unit jackpot, the ratio of bonuses, and the like. Further, the expected number of balls (number of paid-out game balls) expected in the normal game state is calculated based on, for example, the number of lotteries per unit big, the base, and the like. The expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) expected in other than the normal game state (time-short game state, probability variation game state and jackpot game state) is, for example, the theoretical average number of extended games for the first hit, the distribution rate of jackpot type (Figure 7 (C)), and calculated based on the number of theoretical differences in each jackpot type, the ratio of consecutive actors, the ratio of actors, and the like.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the expected appearance value is classified into six ranks S and A to E. Rank S has an expected output of 120% or more, Rank A has an expected output of 110% or more and less than 120%, Rank B has an expected output of 110% or more and less than 120%, Rank C Is expected output value is 110% or more and less than 120%, rank D is expected output value is 110% or more and less than 120%, and rank E is expected output value is less than 80%.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 64 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Since this embodiment has the above-described differences from the first and fourth embodiments described above, the sub timer interrupt process, the game setting value display mode, and the game setting value display process are the same as those described above. Different from the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, on the ending screen in the normal jackpot game, the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed up to the step corresponding to the number of special out balls. In this embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the entire face image is displayed in step 7, and a part of the face image is displayed in steps in steps 1 to 6 (see FIGS. 48 to 52). ). Here, FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the expected ball appearance value and the expected ball appearance value face image in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, the face images are 16 face images A to P as in the above-described fourth embodiment. If the expected ball appearance value is rank S, any one of the face images A to C is selected, and if the expected ball appearance value is rank A, any one of the face images D to F is selected. Is one of the face images G to I, the face image J or K is selected when the expected appearance value is rank C, and the expected appearance value is rank D. When the face image L or M is selected and the expected appearance value is rank E, one of the face images N to P is selected.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the sound lamp control device. As shown in FIG. 62, in this embodiment, in the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the counter update process (step S2001), command determination, as in the first embodiment described above. Processing (step S2002), variable game effect processing (step S2003), and jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) are executed. Moreover, in the sub timer interruption process of this embodiment, it replaces with a game setting value display process, and the expected appearance value display process is performed (step S2005). Hereinafter, the expected ball appearance value display processing will be described with reference to FIG.

[Expected output value display process]
In the present embodiment, in the game setting value display process (step S2005) of the sub timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper part 383 of the game ball staying part 38 is controlled as in the first embodiment described above. Further, in the present embodiment, control is executed in which part or all of the game setting value display face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal jackpot ending. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting value display process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG.

<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the game set value display process of the present embodiment, steps S2201 to S2212 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, so that the upper and lower portions of the stopper 383 of the game ball staying section 38 are moved up and down. Movement is controlled. Further, in step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a face image display process for displaying an output ball setting value image indicating an expected output value up to a predetermined step. Hereinafter, the face image display process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

[Face image display processing]
Here, FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the face image display process executed in the game setting value display process of FIG. As shown in FIG. 64, the face image display process of this embodiment is the same as the face image display process (see FIG. 54) in the fourth embodiment described above, but the processes in steps S3301 and S3302 are the same as those described above. This is different from the face image display process in the fourth embodiment.

<Steps S3301 and S3302>
In the face image display process of the present embodiment, when a face image is not displayed after the opening / closing execution mode ends (step S2901: No), a face image display step is calculated based on the value of the special out-ball counter ( Steps S2901 to S2904). Then, the MPU 51 calculates the expected output value in step S3301. As described above, the expected appearance value is calculated from, for example, the game setting value, the base information, the continuous character ratio information, the character ratio information, the cumulative number of lotteries. Further, the MPU 51 selects a face image type to be displayed on the ending screen based on the rank of the expected appearance value (step S3302). Further, the MPU 51 transmits a face image display command for displaying the face image on the symbol display unit 341 to the display control device 6, clears the value of the special out ball counter, and sets the face image display flag to ON. (Steps S2907 to S2909), the face image display process ends.

  By the way, in the first embodiment described above, some or all of the numbers corresponding to the game setting values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. However, when the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a number, it is easy for the player to guess the game set value, so there is a concern that the interest in the game will be reduced early, and the game set value is low. There is a concern that the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 may decrease.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a part or all of the face image corresponding to the expected appearance value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This expected game expected value is an index reflecting the game setting value, but does not indicate the game setting value itself. Therefore, in the case where a part or all of the face image indicating the expected appearance value is displayed compared to the case where a part or all of the numbers corresponding to the game set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the game Since the set value cannot be recognized, it is suppressed that the interest in the game is reduced early, and the operating rate of the gaming machine 10 having a low game set value is suppressed.

  Further, by displaying a part or all of the face image corresponding to the expected appearance value on the symbol display unit 341, in addition to the appearance performance based on the game setting value, the nail placed on the game board 31 is displayed. It is possible to evaluate the appearance performance in consideration of the state and the surface properties of the game board 31. Thereby, while enjoying the enjoyment of guessing the game setting value, it is possible to guess and enjoy the overall appearance performance of the gaming machine 10.

  In the present embodiment, since the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is not necessary to separately provide the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment. Therefore, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost as compared with the case where the 7-segment display unit 39 is provided, and the control becomes easier than when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled.

  In this embodiment, a part or all of the face image indicating the expected appearance value is displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the normal jackpot game ending. The image shown is not limited to a face image, and may be another image. For example, the game setting value may be indicated by an image such as a whole body image, an animal, a number, a symbol, a character string, or a number string.

  Further, the expected output value may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above. In this case, for example, alphabets or numbers indicating the rank of the expected appearance value may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or a plurality of 7-segment display units 39 are arranged in a plurality of 7-segment display units 39. The expected value may be displayed.

  Moreover, you may evaluate an expected appearance value as a fullness rate with respect to a borderline. Here, the border line is the number of jackpot lotteries required for a loan amount per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected appearance value to 100%, and this border line is the jackpot lottery probability It is calculated on the assumption that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. That is, the border line is the number of lottery wins per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in which the difference ball becomes ± 0 when winning the jackpot according to the theoretical probability. Various borderline calculation methods have been proposed. For example, the borderline can be calculated as the number of balls rented at 1000 yen / (average number of balls in jackpot game / total probability). Here, the number of balls lent per 1000 yen is generally 250 balls. In addition, the average number of balls played in a jackpot game is the number of balls played per jackpot game when the number of round games of the jackpot game is distributed according to a theoretical value. The total probability is an average jackpot winning probability in the case of distribution according to the theoretical value between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Then, the sufficiency rate for the border line is calculated as a ratio between the number of lottery per unit jackpot and the border line. When the borderline fill rate exceeds 100%, the greater the value, the more advantageous to the player. When the borderline fill rate is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more disadvantageous to the player. For example, when the number of lottery per unit is 18 and the number of border lines is 20, the fill rate for the border lines is 90%, which is disadvantageous for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, on the condition that the game ball that has won the variable winning opening 316 enters the special out ball outlet 373 of the cruising device 37, it is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to a stage according to the number of the balls. A part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value is displayed on the ending screen to be displayed on condition that an over winning is generated at the variable winning opening 316 as in the third embodiment described above. A part or all of the face image indicating the game setting value may be displayed on the ending screen displayed on the symbol display unit 341 up to a stage corresponding to the number of over winnings.

  In addition, within the applicable range, design changes similar to the design change items in the first embodiment described above can be made.

  In the first to sixth embodiments, the case has been described in which profit information relating to a game setting value, expected play value, etc. is displayed when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period. However, the profit state is displayed. As a specific condition for this, a design change described below is also possible.

  For example, a player participation type condition may be set as the specific condition. Specifically, for example, let the player predict events that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and if the player's prediction is correct, information that enables the player to infer or recognize profit information is given to the player. Providing is also possible.

  Here, the events that may occur in the future as the game progresses include a big hit from a specific starting point (for example, a floating game expected by the player, a jackpot game opening, a specific round game, a specific interval, ending) The number of jackpot lottery required to win (number of games), the jackpot type (5R regular jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot) when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery after a specific starting point and stop display at the jackpot The main symbol type (for example, 1 to 9) and the effect type in the game executed at a specific timing.

  In addition, when letting a player predict the number of jackpot lotteries required to win a jackpot, it is difficult to make a pinpoint prediction, so for example, the number of jackpot lotteries is less than 50 times, more than 50 times to more than 100 times It is conceivable to make predictions from a plurality of groups such as within 100 times or more and 150 times or less.

  Further, as the prediction type of the production type, for example, the prediction of the final individual production type of the variable game production (whether it is a non-reach production, a normal reach production, a super reach production, or a special reach production), a reach production is executed. Prediction type (step-up effect, rank-up effect, cut-in effect) when the final reach effect type (whether it is normal reach effect, super reach effect, or special reach effect) is predicted And any type of production such as a speech production). In addition, the prediction type of the effect type is not limited to the variable game effect, and may be the prediction of the effect type in the jackpot game effect. For example, the prediction of the opening effect type executed in the opening, the prediction of the round game effect type executed in the specific round game, the ending effect type executed in the ending, and the like can be considered.

  In addition, for example, as described above in the first to sixth embodiments, a display device such as the 7-segment display unit 39, the symbol display unit 341, or the like can be provided to the player. The method of using can be adopted.

  Further, when the player's prediction is correct, information desired by the player may be provided from a plurality of information that can be provided. For example, when providing information that enables the player to guess or recognize profit information using the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G to be controlled when the player's prediction is correct. It is also possible to let the player select For selection of the segments A to G to be controlled, for example, a touch panel is provided on the front surface of the symbol display unit 341, and the segments A to G to be controlled can be selected on the symbol display unit 341 when a player's prediction is correct. By displaying a simple image, it can be realized based on an operation on the touch panel by the player. In addition, when displaying an image in which the segments A to G to be controlled can be selected on the symbol display unit 341, the segments A to G to be controlled are operated by operating the operation unit such as a cross key provided on the upper plate 23 or the like. It may be selectable.

  If the information desired by the player is provided from a plurality of pieces of information when the prediction is correct, the player can determine the level of the game setting value, the game setting value that is most advantageous to the player. Information that can determine whether or not there is a possibility of 6 or information that denies a specific game setting value such as the game setting value 1 that is most disadvantageous to the player can be selected. For example, when the game setting value is displayed by numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to determine whether the game setting value is 5 or 6 or the game setting values 1 to 4 by selecting the segment B. . Specifically, when the segment B is selected and turned on, the game setting values 1 to 4 can be determined, and when the segment B is not turned on, the game setting values 5 and 6 can be determined (see FIG. 40A). ). Further, when the segment G is selected, it can be determined whether or not to negate the game setting value 1 (see FIG. 40A). And if the forecast hits again after the forecast hits, or if new information that has never been selected is selected, the accuracy of the profit information estimation is improved by the combination with the information still obtained. Or the possibility of recognizing profit information increases. As a result, it is possible to provide motivation to continue the game for the purpose of obtaining new information according to the prediction target. In addition, since the player can obtain the desired information based on his / her own judgment, the player decides the desired information based on his / her own criteria as to whether or not to continue the game, and determines whether or not to continue the game. Can be performed early.

  In this way, if the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and the player's prediction is correct, the player is not expected to make a prediction in variable games or jackpot games. You can enjoy whether or not you hit. In addition, compared to the case where profit information such as information related to game setting values can be passively estimated or recognized as the game progresses, the process of improving profit awareness and recognizing or recognizing profit information. You can enjoy even more.

  In addition, multiple events may be predicted, and information on the number or content corresponding to the number of events hit by the prediction may be provided to the player, or information on the number or content corresponding to the expected difficulty level is provided to the player. May be. In this case, a plurality of pieces of information necessary for estimating or recognizing the game setting value or information capable of estimating the game setting value with high accuracy can be obtained at a time depending on the prediction. Therefore, the importance of hitting the prediction is increased, and the player is expected to predict an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses. Can be enjoyed even more.

  Moreover, when making a player anticipate from several choices, you may give odds to each choice. The odds are set according to, for example, the difficulty level of the event included in the option. Specifically, for example, when predicting the final reach production type in the variable game production, the odds of the normal reach production are “1”, the odds of the super reach production are “2”, and the odds of the special reach production are “3”. The odds for each option are set as follows. Accordingly, the player can grasp the occurrence difficulty level of the event that is the prediction target with reference to the odds, and can enjoy the prediction with reference to the odds. Then, when the odds are given to each option, if the player's prediction is correct, information corresponding to the odds can be given. For example, when providing information that enables the player to guess or recognize profit information using the 7-segment display unit 39, the number of segments A to G corresponding to odds should be controlled to be turned on or off. Is also possible. Specifically, if the player hits the option with the odds of 1 in mind, one segment is controlled, and if the player hits the option with the odds of 2 in the hit, 2 One segment becomes the control target, and when the player hits an option with an odds of 3, the three segments become control targets. By providing information in response to odds in this way, the player may have a small amount of information, so the choice is high for safety and the risk is known to obtain a large amount of information. Players can select and enjoy according to their own preference and situation from low-rate options and intermediate intermediate-rate options with an intermediate amount of information without taking safety measures and risk measures.

  Further, when the player predicts an event that may occur in the future, the gaming machine 10 is configured so that an event that is a prediction target is determined as usual without considering the player's prediction. . That is, in the gaming machine 10, the result of the event to be predicted is not determined so that the prediction is arbitrarily deviated, and conversely, the result of the event to be predicted is determined so as to be arbitrarily predicted. There is nothing. Of course, the gaming machine 10 may arbitrarily take a prediction or adopt a configuration in which a prediction is applied.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is one in which a player can select a game mode as a game mode from a plurality of effect groups with respect to an effect group executed in a variable game. For example, a gaming machine that can select a production mode from a plurality of production modes with different jackpot expectations (reliability) and selection rates (including 0%) for specific production such as special reach, jackpot finalizing production, pre-reading notice production, etc. There are gaming machines that can select a production mode from a plurality of production modes with different main characters and appearance characters in the game production. In this type of gaming machine, when the production type is set as an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, if the production mode is changed after the production type is predicted, the player will enter the production mode after the change. It is assumed that a situation in which the expected effect does not exist and a situation in which the selection rate of the effect selected by the player is different before and after the change of the effect mode occur. This problem can be solved by, for example, reselecting the effect type when the effect mode is changed. In addition, when there is a common individual effect type in a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to cope with a change in the effect mode by setting only such common individual effects as options. In addition, the production types are associated with each other in a plurality of production modes, and when the production mode is changed, in the production mode after the change corresponding to the production selected in the production mode before the change. It is also conceivable to deal with the effect as having been selected. In this case, it is preferable to notify the player which effect the effect selected in the effect mode before the change corresponds to in the effect mode after the change.

  Further, as another example of the specific condition of the player participation type, it is considered that the number of times that the player has requested the operation of the operation button 20 for executing the operation effect in the gaming machine 10 reaches a predetermined number of times. It is done. It is also conceivable to set, as a specific condition, that the number of times that the operation button 20 is operated by the player reaches a predetermined number of times that the operation request for the operation button 20 is made to the player. Thereby, when there is an operation request for executing the operation effect, the player can be motivated to operate the operation button 20, so that the operation button 20 is not operated and the operation effect is not executed. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

  Further, when the gaming machine 10 is other than the loop probability changing machine, it is possible to set a specific condition corresponding to the type of the gaming machine 10. For example, in the gaming machine 10 configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine, a specific condition may be satisfied when a big win lottery is won in a specific period during the ST. For example, it is conceivable that the specific period is set to a period in which a large number of STs are left when winning the jackpot (for example, 50% or less, 40% or less, 30% or less, 20% or less, 10% or less, etc.). In other words, a specific condition may be satisfied when the jackpot game is executed with a small number of variable games after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, it is also possible that a specific condition is satisfied when the big win lottery is won at the end of the ST (for example, the remaining ST is 20% or less, 10% or less, 5% or less, etc.).

  Also, in ST machines and V-ST machines, let the player predict at which stage of the ST the jackpot lottery will be won or not, and guess or recognize profit information when the player's prediction is right It is also conceivable to provide the player with information that makes it possible. As options in this case, for example, when ST is 100 times, within 20 times, over 20 times within 40 times, over 40 times within 60 times, over 60 times within 80 times, over 80 times within 100 times, within 100 times It is conceivable that it does not hit And when making a player anticipate, you may make it give odds to each choice as mentioned above, and may provide information corresponding to odds to a player.

  It is also conceivable to establish a specific condition when a disadvantageous situation occurs for the player. Examples of situations that are disadvantageous to the player include:

(1) As a result of lottery in the jackpot lottery, when the regular jackpot continues a predetermined number of times (including one)
(2) When a jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot in this embodiment) other than the jackpot most advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot) as a lottery result in the jackpot lottery continues for a predetermined number of times (1 Times included)
(3) When a regular jackpot is included more than a specific number of times in a specific number of jackpots (when the ratio of the usual jackpots is a predetermined percentage or more)
(4) Of the specific number of jackpots, a jackpot (5R probability variation jackpot and 5R normal jackpot in this embodiment) other than the jackpot most advantageous to the player (in this embodiment, 16R probability variation jackpot) is included more than a predetermined number of times ( When the most advantageous jackpot ratio is less than the predetermined ratio)
(5) When lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode continuously deviate more than a predetermined number of times (6) When the difference ball in the high probability mode is less than a certain number (for example, minus difference ball) (7) When the lottery results in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode continuously deviate more than a predetermined number of times (8) When the difference ball in the low probability mode becomes a negative difference ball more than a certain number

  In addition, in ST machines and V-ST machines, as a disadvantageous situation for the player, if a big hit does not occur during ST when entering ST, the ST will not enter ST as a lottery result in the big win lottery (normal) Examples include a case where a predetermined number of times are continued (including one time), a case where the remaining number of STs is a predetermined number or more (for example, 80 times or more, 90 times or more) (a case where a big win is won early after the start of ST), and the like.

  In addition, when an unfavorable situation occurs in a predetermined period, points may be added, and information capable of estimating or recognizing profit information according to the total points in the predetermined period may be provided. In this case, one disadvantageous situation may be set, or multiple kinds may be set. When a plurality of disadvantageous situations are set, the points when each disadvantageous situation may occur may be the same, or at least some of them may be different.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. It is not a thing. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.
However, it is possible to focus attention on the music output from the audio output means, and also to focus attention on the image display means in order to confirm which unit game is the unit game in which the music change has occurred. Become.

[Appendix A1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy the state of profit by guessing the profit state based on the contents (a part or all of the profit information) displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period. It is possible to enjoy whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) can display the profit information step by step until it can recognize the profit information, and can recognize the profit information at the final stage when a specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A1, wherein the gaming machine is displayed.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2, since the profit information at the final stage is displayed on the profit information display means when the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied, the profit state can be recognized based on this profit information. A player who recognizes the profit state is given an opportunity to determine whether or not to continue playing the game on the gaming machine. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage caused by continuing the game with a gaming machine having a low profit state.

[Appendix A3]
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A1 or appendix A2, wherein the display content is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A3, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the profit state based on the display contents (a part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. Thus, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what is displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A3, wherein the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period can be recognized.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A4, since the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period can be recognized, the player can easily grasp the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, for example, when the player confirms that a specific condition is satisfied more than the upper limit number, the player can grasp in advance that the profit information at the final stage where the profit state can be recognized is displayed on the profit information display means. . In addition, even if the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is less than the upper limit number, the content displayed on the profit information display means (profit information) in consideration of the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period Profit status can be inferred based on (part of). As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit state is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state is also increased, so that the gameability is further improved.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to appendix A4, further comprising a retention means (38) for recognizing a number of game balls corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition that is satisfied in the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period can be easily recognized based on the number of game balls retained in the retention means.

[Appendix A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A5, wherein the specific condition can be established when a game ball passes through the specific region (363).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6, since the specific condition can be established when the specific area passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can enjoy more about whether a specific condition is satisfy | filled. In addition, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where a game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix A7]
It further includes discharge ports (318, 373) for discharging on the back side of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (318, 373).

[Appendix A8]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls are further provided,
The discharge ports (318, 373) include a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board, and the first A second outlet (373) different from the outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to appendix A7, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix A9]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A8, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A9, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port where a game ball can enter in a special game. . Therefore, in a special game in which a game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game performance by paying attention to whether or not a game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix A10]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the variable prize opening (316).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A10, profit information is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port where game balls that have passed through a variable winning opening that can enter game balls in special games can enter. The display content related to the profit information displayed on the means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a game ball can be inserted into the second discharge port by launching a game ball in the game area and winning the game ball in the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to infer or recognize the profit state based on the display contents (part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means without requiring a special skill only by proceeding the game as usual in the special game. As a result, it may be avoided to play a game in the gaming machine because a skill difference may occur compared to a case where a skill difference may occur due to a game ball entering the second outlet. Is prevented.

[Appendix A11]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls are further provided,
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area is at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316).

[Appendix A12]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to appendix A11, wherein the specific area is the variable prize opening (316).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A11 and Supplementary Note A12, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the winning opening from which a winning ball such as a variable winning opening is paid out. Thereby, the game property which can acquire the profit of obtaining the information which can guess or recognize profit information on the opportunity that a player acquires the profit of a prize ball is provided. Therefore, compared to a gaming machine that simply obtains a winning ball by entering a winning ball into the winning port, it is more important to enter a gaming ball into the winning port. It is possible to attract attention and to be interested in entering a game ball into the winning opening, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A13]
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls;
A first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A second discharge port (373) and a third discharge port (378) different from the first discharge port (318) for discharging the game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) to the back side of the game board. When,
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game ball that has entered the variable winning opening (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378);
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution unit, whether or not a specific condition is satisfied depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution unit The game is given. This makes it possible to enjoy a game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the distribution means as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A14]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination (big win lottery) by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first winning opening (314) can enter a game ball launched into the left area of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix A13, wherein the variable winning opening (316) is capable of entering a game ball launched into a right region of the game board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, since the game ball fired in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, it is necessary to perform so-called left-handed in order to receive the determination to shift to the special game There is. On the other hand, since the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform a so-called right strike in the special game. Then, the distribution means can distribute the game ball launched into the right area of the game board to the second discharge port. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state in the game for receiving the determination to shift to the special game, while it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in the special game. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated or recognized at the time of right-handing such as a special game, it is possible to give motivation to continue the game until the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix A15]
The game machine according to Supplementary Note A13 or Supplementary Note A14, wherein the second discharge port (373) is more difficult to enter than the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix A16]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15, wherein the second outlet (373) is provided above the third outlet (378).

[Appendix A17]
The gaming machine according to appendix A15 or appendix A16, wherein the second discharge port (373) has a smaller opening area than the third discharge port (378).

  In the gaming machines according to appendix A15 to appendix A17, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second outlet compared to the third outlet, so it is difficult to satisfy specific conditions, and it is easy to estimate or grasp the profit state. is not. Therefore, when the player's profit state is low, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low, so that the game at the gaming machine is stopped early. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

[Appendix A18]
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started, so that it is possible to enter a game ball, and it is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed or an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix A12, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball exceeding an upper limit number is inserted into the variable winning opening (316).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18, when there is an excessive winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit number to the variable winning opening in the unit game of the special game, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means. In other words, the profit state cannot be estimated or recognized unless excessive winnings are made. Thus, it is possible to suppress the so-called stop-stop, in which the launch of the game ball is stopped in the final stage of the unit game or between the unit games (interval) for the purpose of reducing the number of game balls launched in the unit game of the special game.

[Appendix A19]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
A start opening (314, 315) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by passing a game ball;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix A6, wherein the specific area is the start opening (314, 315).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A19, the display content related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the start opening that establishes the determination condition for determining the transition to the special game state. Is done. Thereby, the game property which can acquire the profit of obtaining the information which can guess or recognize profit information on the opportunity that a player acquires the profit of establishment of judgment conditions is provided. Therefore, since the importance of entering a game ball at the start port is increased compared to a game machine that can obtain the benefit that the determination condition is simply satisfied by entering the game ball at the start port, the game ball at the start port It is possible to focus attention on the entrance of the game, and to be interested in the entrance of the game ball to the start opening, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A20]
Retaining means (38) for retaining the game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) in the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the predetermined period has elapsed;
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A6 to appendix A19, wherein the display content is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A20, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the profit information based on the display contents (a part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. Thus, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what is displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix A21]
The staying means (38) is a movable member (383) movable between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that permits the movement of the game ball. With
The gaming machine according to appendix A20, wherein the movable member (383) is at the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period and is at the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A21, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained and a state in which the game ball is not retained in the retention means by a simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix A22]
The gaming machine according to appendix A20 or appendix A21, wherein the game ball retained in the retention means (38) is visible.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A22, since the game balls retained in the retention means can be visually recognized, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (the number of specific conditions satisfied). . Therefore, for example, if the player confirms that more than the upper limit number of game balls has been retained in the retention means, the profit information display means displays in advance the profit information at the final stage where the profit state can be recognized. I can grasp. Even if game balls that do not reach the upper limit number are retained in the retention means, the profit is displayed based on the display contents (part of profit information) on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of game balls visually recognized. The state can be inferred. As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit state is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state is also increased, so that the gameability is further improved.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A5, wherein the specific condition is established when a specific event occurs during the progress of the game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A23, the display content related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific condition established by occurrence of a specific event during the game is satisfied for a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, and is displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the specific event. It is possible to guess and enjoy the profit status according to the contents. In this way, the profitability can be estimated by the occurrence of a specific event during the progress of the game, so that the gameability is improved and the player can be motivated to continue the game. .

[Appendix A24]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the specific event occurs when the player gains profit.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A24, the display content related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player's profit is controlled. The Thereby, since the game property which gives the additional profit of obtaining the information which can estimate or recognize profit information with the profit as an opportunity is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the specific event occurs when a player obtains a profit and a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A25, when a specific event occurs when a specific event occurs when a new profit is obtained when the player gains profit, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means. Display contents related to profit information are controlled. As a result, when new profits are obtained when profits are obtained, the game is provided with an additional benefit of obtaining information that can be used to guess or recognize profit information. Be improved.

[Appendix A26]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The gaming machine according to appendix A24 or appendix A25, wherein the specific event is a transition to the special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A26, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the player obtains the profit of shifting to the special gaming state. Thereby, when the game state is shifted to the special game state, the game is provided with an additional benefit of obtaining information capable of estimating or recognizing the profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started, so that it is possible to enter a game ball, and it is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed or an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix A26, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball exceeding an upper limit number is inserted into the variable winning opening (316).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27, when profits of excess winnings (so-called over winnings) exceeding the upper limit number of variable winnings are obtained in the unit game of special games, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means. As a result, in the case where a profit of excessive winning in a unit game of a special game is obtained, a game property that gives an additional profit of obtaining information that can be estimated or recognized profit information is given. Is improved. In addition, since the profit state cannot be estimated or recognized unless excessive winnings are made, in order to reduce the number of game balls to be launched in the unit game of special games, the game balls can be used at the end of the unit game or between unit games (interval). It is possible to suppress so-called stop-off that stops the firing.

[Appendix A28]
The game according to appendix A26, wherein the specific condition is that the number of times determined to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) by the transition determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A28, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when the game machine is shifted to the special game state a predetermined number of times during a predetermined period. As a result, the accumulation of the profit that is transferred to the special gaming state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period gives a game property that provides an additional profit of obtaining or recognizing profit information. Interest is improved.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to appendix A23, wherein the specific event occurs when a player receives a disadvantage.

[Appendix A30]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The disadvantage is that the determination result of shifting to the first special gaming state continuously for a predetermined number of times is obtained when the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state is obtained in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix A29, characterized in that

[Appendix A31]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The disadvantage is that, in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), a determination result that the transition to the special gaming state is continued a predetermined number of times cannot be obtained. Game machines.

[Appendix A32]
A gaming state transition means (41) for transitioning a gaming state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of gaming states;
Transition that determines whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery) Determination means (41);
Further comprising
The gaming state includes a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state), a first gaming state (low probability mode) in which a result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit (41) is notified, and the transition determination unit (41). And the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state is higher than that of the first gaming state and the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming state transition means (41)
In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, when it is determined by the transition determining means (41) to shift to the special gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state,
In the second gaming state, when it is not determined by the transition determining means (41) to shift to the special gaming state before receiving the upper limit number of the transition determinations by the transition determining means (41). , Transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state,
The disadvantage is that, in the second gaming state, the transition determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is made before receiving the transition determination less than half of the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to appendix A31, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A29 to Supplementary Note A32, display relating to profit information displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player obtaining a disadvantage The content is controlled. Specifically, for example, when the big jackpots are continuous, when the losing does not become big jackpots continuously, or when the remaining ST count is large in the ST machine, the display contents regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. The That is, as a remedy against the player's disadvantage, information that can be used to guess or recognize profit information is given. Thereby, the disadvantage to the player can be remedied, and the game property that the profit information can be estimated or recognized can be given as remedy for the disadvantage, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A33]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A32, wherein a start period of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A33, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is at least a specific condition satisfied after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix A34]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to appendix A33, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A34, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix A35]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note A1 to Supplementary Note A34, wherein:

[Appendix A36]
The gaming machine according to appendix A35, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. In contrast, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A35 and Supplementary Note A36, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix A37]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix A36, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-added game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A37, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix A38]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A37, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) includes a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A38, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to attachment A38, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A39, specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so that profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix A40]
The supplementary note A39 is characterized in that the display control means (51) controls a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period, among the plurality of display areas. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A40, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A38 to appendix A40, wherein the profit information display means (39) includes a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A41, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to appendix A41, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A42, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A38 to appendix A40, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A43, since the profit status image that can recognize the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the mode of the profit status image and the profit status image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix A44]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the shift determination is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A44, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image that informs or suggests the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A45]
The profit status image includes a plurality of image elements;
The display control means (51)
In accordance with the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the profit information display means (341) displays the plurality of image elements in stages.
The gaming machine according to appendix A43 to appendix A44, wherein the profit status image is displayed on the profit information display means (341) when the upper limit number of the specific conditions is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A45, a plurality of image elements are displayed in stages on the profit information display means according to the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit state when the upper limit number of specific conditions is satisfied, and when the upper limit number of specific conditions is not satisfied, the player can profit according to the number of the specific conditions satisfied. A profit state can be estimated and enjoyed by a combination of image elements displayed on the information display means, and whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number can also be enjoyed. In this way, the profitability can be recognized or guessed, so that the gameability is improved and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix A46]
The profit information display means (341) has a plurality of individual areas capable of displaying a plurality of profit state candidate images including the profit state image,
The profit information display means (341) displays the profit state candidate image in each of the plurality of individual areas when the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period,
The display control means (51) changes the visibility of the profit state candidate images excluding the number of the profit state images corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A gaming machine according to A45.

[Appendix A47]
The display control means (51) makes the profit state candidate images excluding the number of profit state images corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period invisible or difficult. The gaming machine according to appendix A46.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A46 and Supplementary Note A47, the visibility of the profit state candidate image excluding the profit state image is changed according to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit state by the profit state image when the upper limit number of specific conditions is satisfied, and if the upper limit number of the specific conditions is not satisfied, the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied The profit status can be estimated and enjoyed by the profit status candidate image displayed on the profit information display means according to the situation, and whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number. Can do. In this way, the profitability can be recognized or guessed, so that the gameability is improved and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix A48]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The game machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A47, wherein the game machine is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A48, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix A49]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A48, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A49, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A50]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A49, wherein display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A50, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix A51]
The game according to appendix A48, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A51, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information randomly selected from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A50, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix A52]
The display control means (51) displays the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) when an operation is performed on the operation means by a player when the specific condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A51, characterized in that the content is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A52, when the player performs an operation on the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled. Therefore, the player can obtain part or all of the profit information by operating the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, in order to display a part or all of the profit information on the profit information display means, the game is improved by actively participating the player.

[Appendix A53]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, a display area to be controlled by the display control means (51) can be selected from the plurality of display areas by an operation on the operation means. The gaming machine according to appendix A52.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A53, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can select a display area in which any one of the plurality of information (partial information of profit information) is displayed from the plurality of display areas. Therefore, the player can estimate the profit state by selecting the display area based on his / her own judgment and obtaining a part of the profit information. This makes it possible to obtain different information by selecting a different display area each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to appendix A53, wherein the specific condition is that the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and the player's prediction is correct.

[Appendix A55]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Production means (341) in which production is executed in the progress of the game;
Further comprising
The special game includes a plurality of special games having different advantages for the player,
The event is a transition determination until the transition determination result in the transition determination means (41) is shifted to a special game after the transition determination result shifts to a special game. The number of times, and when the result of the transition determination is to shift to a special game, includes at least one of a special game type and an effect type executed in the effect means A gaming machine according to A54.

  In the game machines according to Supplementary Note A54 and Supplementary Note A55, if the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and the player's prediction is correct, the player will change You can enjoy whether or not the predictions are correct in games and jackpot games. In addition, compared to the case where profit information such as information related to game setting values can be passively estimated or recognized as the game progresses, the process of improving profit awareness and recognizing or recognizing profit information. You can enjoy even more.

[Appendix A56]
When the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display control is performed by operating the operation means from the plurality of display areas according to the number of the special conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix A55, wherein the gaming machine can be selected as a control target by the means (51).

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A55 or Supplementary Note A56, wherein each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A56 and Supplementary Note A57, a number of display areas corresponding to the number of special conditions satisfied in a predetermined period can be selected from a plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during a predetermined period, two or more pieces of information among the plurality of pieces of information can be obtained by selecting the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times. As a result, two or more pieces of information can be obtained after one predetermined period of time, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix A58]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to appendix A57.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A58, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix A59]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix A58, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A59, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that has a large influence on the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the game performance of the gaming machine It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix A60]
The gaming machine according to appendix A58 or appendix A59, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A60, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player can perform the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix A61]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix A60, characterized in that it includes information on the number of unit determinations made by the transition determination means (41) when the game ball is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A61, since the information regarding the number of unit determinations is included as performance information which is advantageous information, the information regarding the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix A62]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix A60, including information relating to a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A62, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix A63]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix A60, comprising information relating to a ratio of consecutive actors, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A63, as the performance information that is advantageous information, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio, and therefore information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix A64]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix A60.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note A64, since the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio as the performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix A65]
65. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix 64, wherein the performance information is information related to an expected appearance value.

[Appendix A66]
The expected expected value is the expected number of balls (the number of payout game balls) with respect to the total number of game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are fired. The gaming machine according to appendix A65, wherein the gaming machine is a ratio.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A65 and Supplementary Note A66, since the information regarding the expected appearance value is included as the performance information that is the advantageous information, the information regarding the expected appearance value can be estimated or recognized. Here, the expected output value is, for example, the expected number of balls (paid game balls) with respect to the total number of game balls (total number of out balls) when a certain number of game balls (for example, 60,000 balls) are launched. Number). Expected number of balls is 100% when the total number of launched game balls (total number of out balls) is equal to the expected number of balls (number of game balls to be paid out). The number is more than 100% when the number of balls is larger, and is less than 100% when the expected number of balls (number of payout game balls) is smaller. That is, it is advantageous for the player when the expected appearance value exceeds 100%, and the higher the numerical value, the higher the appearance performance. On the other hand, when the expected appearance value is less than 100%, it is disadvantageous for the player, and the lower the value, the lower the appearance performance. In this way, the expected output value has a high correlation with the output performance of the gaming machine, so there is more variation in the output performance between the gaming machines due to individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine and changes over time. It is possible to guess or recognize the game performance appropriately reflected by the player. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the expected expected value, enjoying the game while expecting the expected expected value to be recognized, and playing the game based on the expected expected value or the recognition result. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix A67]
A transition determination means (41) for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
A first winning opening (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball;
Entering the game ball into the first winning opening (314) until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number, or until the number of game ball shots on the game board (31) reaches the specific ball number Unit determination number calculation means (41) for calculating the number of unit determinations performed by the shift determination means (41) using the ball as a trigger;
Border line calculation means (51) for calculating a border line that is the number of transition determinations required for a loan amount per unit amount (for example, 1000 yen) in order to set the expected appearance value to 100%;
Further comprising
The expected appearance value is a borderline sufficiency rate that is a ratio of the unit determination times calculated by the determination frequency calculation means (41) to the borderline calculated by the borderline calculation means (51). The gaming machine according to appendix A65, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A67, since the performance information that is advantageous information includes information related to the borderline satisfaction rate, which is an example of the expected output value, information related to the borderline satisfaction rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the border line is the number of transition determinations required for the ball lending per unit amount in order to set the expected appearance value to 100%. In general, the result of the transition determination is the special game according to the advantage determination probability. It is calculated on the assumption that it will be transferred to. The borderline fill rate is the ratio of the number of unit judgments to the borderline. When it exceeds 100%, the larger the value, the more advantageous to the player. When the value is less than 100%, the smaller the value, the more the game Disadvantageous. Therefore, the player enjoys guessing or recognizing the borderline fill rate by being able to guess or recognize information about the borderline fill rate, enjoying the game while expecting that the borderline fill rate can be recognized, It is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the estimation of the borderline satisfaction rate or the recognition result.

[Appendix B1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific condition can be established when a game ball passes through the specific area.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1, since the specific condition can be established when the specific area passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can enjoy more about whether a specific condition is satisfy | filled. In addition, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where a game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2]
It further comprises discharge ports (318, 373) for discharging game balls flowing down to the game area to the back side of the game board,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (318, 373).

[Appendix B3]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls are further provided,
The discharge ports (318, 373) include a first discharge port (318) that discharges game balls that have not been inserted into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board, and the first A second outlet (373) different from the outlet (318),
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the specific area is the second outlet (373).

[Appendix B4]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The gaming machine according to appendix B3, wherein the second outlet (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B4, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port where a game ball can enter in a special game. . Therefore, in a special game in which a game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game performance by paying attention to whether or not a game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix B5]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B4, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, profit information is displayed according to the number of game balls that have entered the second discharge port where game balls that have passed through a variable winning opening that can enter game balls in special games can enter. The display content related to the profit information displayed on the means is controlled. Therefore, in a special game, a game ball can be inserted into the second discharge port by launching a game ball in the game area and winning the game ball in the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state without requiring a special skill only by advancing the game as usual in the special game. As a result, it may be avoided to play a game in the gaming machine because a skill difference may occur compared to a case where a skill difference may occur due to a game ball entering the second outlet. Is prevented.

[Appendix B6]
A plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls are further provided,
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific area is at least one of the plurality of winning holes (313 to 316).

[Appendix B7]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The gaming machine according to appendix B6, wherein the specific area is the variable prize opening (316).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B6 and Supplementary Note B7, the display content related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a game ball enters a winning opening from which a winning ball such as a variable winning opening is paid out. Thereby, the game property which can acquire the profit of obtaining the information which can guess or recognize profit information on the opportunity that a player acquires the profit of a prize ball is provided. Therefore, compared to a gaming machine that simply obtains a winning ball by entering a winning ball into the winning port, it is more important to enter a gaming ball into the winning port. It is possible to attract attention and to be interested in entering a game ball into the winning opening, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B8]
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started, so that it is possible to enter a game ball, and it is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed or an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix B7, wherein the specific condition is that a game ball exceeding an upper limit number is inserted into the variable winning opening (316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B8, when there is an excessive winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit number to the variable winning opening in the unit game of the special game, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means. In other words, the profit state cannot be estimated or recognized unless excessive winnings are made. Thus, it is possible to suppress the so-called stop-stop, in which the launch of the game ball is stopped in the final stage of the unit game or between the unit games (interval) for the purpose of reducing the number of game balls launched in the unit game of the special game.

[Appendix B9]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
A start opening (314, 315) that gives an opportunity to make the transition determination by passing a game ball;
Further comprising
The gaming machine according to appendix B1, wherein the specific area is the start opening (314, 315).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B9, the display content related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball enters the start opening that establishes the determination condition for determining the transition to the special game state. Is done. Thereby, the game property which can acquire the profit of obtaining the information which can guess or recognize profit information on the opportunity that a player acquires the profit of establishment of judgment conditions is provided. Therefore, since the importance of entering a game ball at the start port is increased compared to a game machine that can obtain the benefit that the determination condition is simply satisfied by entering the game ball at the start port, the game ball at the start port It is possible to focus attention on the entrance of the game, and to be interested in the entrance of the game ball to the start opening, and the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B10]
Retaining means (38) for retaining the game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) in the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the predetermined period has elapsed;
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B9, wherein the display content is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the profit state based on the display contents of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. Thus, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what is displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix B11]
The staying means (38) is a movable member (383) movable between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that permits the movement of the game ball. With
The gaming machine according to appendix B10, wherein the movable member (383) is at the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period and is at the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B11, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained and a state in which the game ball is not retained in the retention means by a simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix B12]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10 or Supplementary Note B11, wherein the game ball retained in the retention means (38) is visible.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B12, the game balls retained in the retention means can be visually recognized, so the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (the number of specific conditions satisfied). . Therefore, for example, when the player confirms that more than the upper limit number of game balls are retained in the retention means, the player can grasp in advance that the profit state is recognizable and displayed on the profit information display means. Further, even when game balls that are less than the upper limit number are retained in the retention means, the profit state can be estimated based on the display contents on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of visually recognized game balls. . As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit state is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state is also increased, so that the gameability is further improved.

[Appendix B13]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The gaming machine according to appendix B11 or appendix B12, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B13, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix B14]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to appendix B13, characterized by being set to

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B14, in the first gaming state in which the probability that it is determined that the start of the predetermined period is shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix B15]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note B1 to Supplementary Note B14, wherein:

[Appendix B16]
The gaming machine according to appendix B15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B15 and B16, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix B17]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix B16, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-added game and the end point of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B17, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end time of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix B18]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B17, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B18, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix B19]
The gaming machine according to appendix B18, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B19, specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so that profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix B20]
In the supplementary note B19, the display control unit (51) controls a number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period, among the plurality of display areas. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B20, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix B21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B18 to appendix B20, wherein the profit information display means (39) includes a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B21, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix B22]
The gaming machine according to appendix B21, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B22, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed corresponding to the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B17 to appendix B20, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B23, since the profit state image capable of recognizing the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the form of the profit state image and the profit state image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix B24]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the shift determination is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B24, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image that informs or suggests the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix B25]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note B17 to Supplementary Note B24, wherein the game machine is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B25, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix B26]
The gaming machine according to appendix B25, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B26, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B27]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix B26, wherein display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B27, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix B28]
The game according to appendix B26, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B28, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B28, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and simple control necessary to select information to be controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is selected. It becomes.

[Appendix B29]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to Appendix B28.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B29, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix B30]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix B29, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B30, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the game performance of the gaming machine It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix B31]
The gaming machine according to appendix B29 or appendix B30, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B31, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player has the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix B32]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix B31, including information on the number of unit determinations made by the transition determination means (41) when the transition determination unit (41) performs the transition determination when the game ball enters.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B32, since the information related to the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix B33]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix B31, including information on a payout rate (base) that is a ratio of a total payout ball number to a payout ball number of the game ball with respect to a game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B33, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix B34]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B31, including information related to a ratio of consecutive actors, which is a ratio occupied by the number of payout balls with respect to an incoming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B34, since the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix B35]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix B31.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B35, since the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio as the performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix C1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific condition is established when a specific event occurs during the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific condition established by the occurrence of a specific event during the game is satisfied for a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can enjoy whether or not a specific event occurs during the progress of the game, and is displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the specific event. It is possible to guess and enjoy the profit status according to the contents. In this way, the profitability can be estimated by the occurrence of a specific event during the progress of the game, so that the gameability is improved and the player can be motivated to continue the game. .

[Appendix C2]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the specific event occurs when a player obtains profits.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C2, the display content related to profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player's profit. The Thereby, since the game property which gives the additional profit of obtaining the information which can estimate or recognize profit information with the profit as an opportunity is provided, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C3]
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the specific event occurs when a player obtains a profit and a new profit is obtained by obtaining the profit.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C3, when the player obtains a profit, the profit information display means displays when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event by obtaining a new profit. Display contents related to profit information are controlled. As a result, when new profits are obtained when profits are obtained, the game is provided with an additional benefit of obtaining information that can be used to guess or recognize profit information. Be improved.

[Appendix C4]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The gaming machine according to appendix C2 or appendix C3, wherein the specific event is a transition to the special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the player acquires the profit of shifting to the special gaming state. Thereby, when the game state is shifted to the special game state, the game is provided with an additional benefit of obtaining information capable of estimating or recognizing the profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The variable winning opening (316) is opened when the unit game is started, so that it is possible to enter a game ball, and it is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed or an upper limit number of game balls have entered,
The gaming machine according to appendix C4, wherein the specific condition is that a gaming ball exceeding an upper limit number is inserted into the variable winning opening (316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C5, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when a profit of excess winning (so-called over winning) exceeding the upper limit number to the variable winning opening is obtained in the unit game of the special game. As a result, in the case where a profit of excessive winning in a unit game of a special game is obtained, a game property that gives an additional profit of obtaining information that can be estimated or recognized profit information is given. Is improved. In addition, since the profit state cannot be estimated or recognized unless excessive winnings are made, in order to reduce the number of game balls to be launched in the unit game of special games, the game balls can be used at the end of the unit game or between unit games (interval). It is possible to suppress so-called stop-off that stops the firing.

[Appendix C6]
The game according to appendix C4, wherein the specific condition is that the number of times determined to shift to the special game state (big hit game state) by the transition determination means (41) reaches a predetermined number of times. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6, the profit information is displayed on the profit information display means when the game machine is shifted to the special game state a predetermined number of times during a predetermined period. As a result, the accumulation of the profit that is transferred to the special gaming state a predetermined number of times in a predetermined period gives a game property that provides an additional profit of obtaining or recognizing profit information. Interest is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The gaming machine according to appendix C1, wherein the specific event occurs when the player receives a disadvantage.

[Appendix C8]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The disadvantage is that the determination result of shifting to the first special gaming state continuously for a predetermined number of times is obtained when the determination result of shifting to the special gaming state is obtained in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the gaming machine is obtained.

[Appendix C9]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The disadvantage is that, in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41), the determination result that the transition to the special gaming state is continued a predetermined number of times cannot be obtained. Game machines.

[Appendix C10]
A gaming state transition means (41) for transitioning a gaming state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of gaming states;
Transition that determines whether or not to shift the game state to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (big hit game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition (big hit lottery) Determination means (41);
Further comprising
The gaming state includes a special gaming state (a jackpot gaming state), a first gaming state (low probability mode) in which a result of the transition determination by the transition determination unit (41) is notified, and the transition determination unit (41). And the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state is higher than that of the first gaming state and the result of the transition determination is notified,
The gaming state transition means (41)
In the first gaming state or the second gaming state, when it is determined by the transition determining means (41) to shift to the special gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the special gaming state,
In the second gaming state, when it is not determined by the transition determining means (41) to shift to the special gaming state before receiving the upper limit number of the transition determinations by the transition determining means (41). , Transitioning the gaming state to the second gaming state,
The disadvantage is that, in the second gaming state, the transition determining means (41) determines that the transition to the special gaming state is made before receiving the transition determination less than half of the upper limit number. The gaming machine according to appendix C7, which is characterized.

  In the gaming machines according to supplementary notes C7 to C10, the display relating to profit information displayed on the profit information display means when a specific condition is satisfied by the occurrence of a specific event triggered by the player obtaining a disadvantage The content is controlled. Specifically, for example, when the big jackpots are continuous, when the losing does not become big jackpots continuously, or when the remaining ST count is large in the ST machine, the display contents regarding the profit information displayed on the profit information display means are controlled. The That is, as a remedy against the player's disadvantage, information that can be used to guess or recognize profit information is given. Thereby, the disadvantage to the player can be remedied, and the game property that the profit information can be estimated or recognized can be given as remedy for the disadvantage, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment C11, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is at least a specific condition satisfied after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix C12]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  In the gaming machine according to attachment C12, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix C13]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note C1 to Supplementary Note C12, wherein:

[Appendix C14]
The gaming machine according to appendix C13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Appendix C13 and Appendix C14, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix C15]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix C14, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-added game and the end point of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C15, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special gaming state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix C15]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C14, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment C15, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix C16]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C15, wherein each of the plurality of display areas displays specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C16, specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so that profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix C17]
The display control means (51) controls display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) according to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix C15 or appendix C16, characterized by the above.

[Appendix C18]
The display control means (51) controls the number of display areas according to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas as a control target. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C17 and Supplementary Note C18, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix C19]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C13 to appendix C18, wherein the profit information display means (39) includes a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C19, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix C20]
The gaming machine according to appendix C19, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C20, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix C21]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C14 to appendix C18, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C21, since the profit status image that can recognize the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the mode of the profit status image and the profit status image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix C22]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the shift determination is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C22, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image that informs or suggests the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix C23]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C14 to appendix C22, wherein the game machine is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C23, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix C24]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C23, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C24, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C25]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix C24, which controls display of the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C25, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix C26]
The game according to appendix C23, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C26, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C25, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix C27]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to Appendix C26.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C27, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix C28]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix C27, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) related to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C28, since the profit information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the output performance of the gaming machine, the output performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix C29]
The gaming machine according to appendix C27 or appendix C28, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C29, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player has the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix C30]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. A game machine as set forth in Appendix C29, which includes information on the number of unit determinations made by the transfer determination means (41) when the game ball enters the game ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C30, the information related to the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized because the information related to the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix C31]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix C29, including information relating to a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C31, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix C32]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to supplementary note C29, comprising information relating to a continuous character ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C32, as the performance information that is advantageous information, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio, and therefore information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix C33]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). A gaming machine according to appendix C29.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C33, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, and therefore information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix D1]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that give a player a game value,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is at least a specific condition satisfied after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix D2]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination result is A second special gaming state (5R probability variation big hit gaming state and 16R probability variation big hit gaming state) to be transferred to the notified second gaming state (high probability mode),
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to attachment D1, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D2, in the first gaming state in which the probability that it is determined that the start of the predetermined period is shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix D3]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to appendix D1 or appendix D2, characterized in that

[Appendix D4]
The gaming machine according to appendix D3, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game, neither the game value is given nor the transition determination result is notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D3 and Supplementary Note D4, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix D5]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determination means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination result is A second special gaming state (5R probability variation big hit gaming state and 16R probability variation big hit gaming state) to be transferred to the notified second gaming state (high probability mode),
The gaming machine according to appendix D4, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-added game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state When the result of the determination of the transition to the second gaming state shifts to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix D6]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D5, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D6, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix D7]
The gaming machine according to appendix D6, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D7, since specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix D8]
In the supplementary note D7, the display control means (51) controls the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix D9]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D6 to D8, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D9, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to appendix D9, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D10, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix D11]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D6 to appendix D8, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D11, since the profit status image that can recognize the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the mode of the profit status image and the profit status image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix D12]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) indicating or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D12, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image that informs or suggests the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix D13]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note D1 to Supplementary Note D12, which is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D13, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix D14]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D13, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D14, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D15]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix D14, wherein display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D15, the display of the plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix D16]
The game according to appendix D13, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D16, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D15, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix D17]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to D16.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D17, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix D18]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix D17, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D18, the profit information includes information related to the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix D19]
The gaming machine according to appendix D13 or appendix D14, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D19, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player can perform the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix D20]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The game machine according to appendix D19, which includes information on the number of unit determinations made by the transfer determination means (41) when the game ball enters the game ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D20, information relating to the number of unit determinations is included as performance information which is advantageous information, and therefore information relating to the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix D21]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix D19, including information regarding a payout rate (base) that is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D21, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix D22]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix D19, including information related to a continuous character ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D22, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, and therefore information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix D23]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). A gaming machine according to appendix D19.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D23, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio as the performance information that is advantageous information. Therefore, the information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix E1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E1, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix E2]
The gaming machine according to appendix E1, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E2, specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so that profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix E3]
In the supplementary note E2, the display control means (51) controls the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period, among the plurality of display areas. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E3, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E3, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E4, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E5]
The gaming machine according to appendix E4, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5, the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, so that the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E3, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6, since the profit state image capable of recognizing the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the form of the profit state image and the profit state image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix E7]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) indicating or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E7, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image informing or suggesting the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
The profit status image includes a plurality of image elements;
The display control means (51)
In accordance with the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the profit information display means (341) displays the plurality of image elements in stages.
The gaming machine according to appendix E6 or appendix E7, wherein the profit status image is displayed on the profit information display means (341) when the upper limit number of the specific conditions is satisfied.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E8, a plurality of image elements are displayed in stages on the profit information display unit according to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit state when the upper limit number of specific conditions is satisfied, and when the upper limit number of specific conditions is not satisfied, the player can profit according to the number of the specific conditions satisfied. A profit state can be estimated and enjoyed by a combination of image elements displayed on the information display means, and whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number can also be enjoyed. In this way, the profitability can be recognized or guessed, so that the gameability is improved and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix E9]
The profit information display means (341) has a plurality of individual areas capable of displaying a plurality of profit state candidate images including the profit state image,
The profit information display means (341) displays the profit state candidate image in each of the plurality of individual areas when the specific condition is not satisfied in the predetermined period,
The display control means (51) changes the visibility of the profit state candidate images excluding the number of the profit state images corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A gaming machine according to E8.

[Appendix E10]
The display control means (51) makes the profit state candidate images excluding the number of profit state images corresponding to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period invisible or difficult. The gaming machine according to appendix E9.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E9 and Supplementary Note E10, the visibility of the profit state candidate image excluding the profit state image is changed according to the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can recognize the profit state by the profit state image when the upper limit number of specific conditions is satisfied, and if the upper limit number of the specific conditions is not satisfied, the number of the specific conditions that are satisfied The profit status can be estimated and enjoyed by the profit status candidate image displayed on the profit information display means according to the situation, and whether or not a specific condition is satisfied up to the upper limit number. Can do. In this way, the profitability can be recognized or guessed, so that the gameability is improved and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix E11]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E10, wherein the gaming machines are executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E11, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix E12]
The gaming machine according to appendix E11, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E12, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E13]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix E12, wherein display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E13, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix E14]
The game according to appendix E11, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E14, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to supplementary note E13, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E14, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E15, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is at least a specific condition satisfied after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix E16]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to attachment E15, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E16, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to be shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix E17]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes E1 to E16, wherein

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to appendix E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E17 and Supplementary Note E18, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-added game and the end point of the jackpot game. Therefore, a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix E19]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix E18, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-added game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E19, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special gaming state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix E20]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to appendix E19.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E20, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix E21]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E21, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix E22]
The gaming machine according to appendix E20 or appendix E21, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E22, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player can perform the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix E23]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix E22, comprising information on the number of unit determinations made by the transition determination means (41) when the transition determination means (41) makes the transition when the game ball enters.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E23, since information related to the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix E24]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix E22, including information regarding a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E24, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix E25]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix E22, comprising information related to a continuous feature ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E25, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, and therefore information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix E26]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E22.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E26, as the performance information that is advantageous information, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio, so that information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix F1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. A game machine that is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix F2]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F2, the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled in a predetermined order when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F3]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix F2, which controls display of the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix F4]
The game according to appendix F1, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F4, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix F1 to appendix F4, wherein a start period of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix F5, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix F6]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to appendix F5, characterized by being set to:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment F6, in the first gaming state in which the probability that it is determined that the start of the predetermined period is shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix F7]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note E1 to Supplementary Note E6, wherein:

[Appendix F8]
The gaming machine according to appendix F7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. In contrast, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F7 and Supplementary Note F8, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix F9]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix F8, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-added game and the end point of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment F9, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix F10]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance A gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F9.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F10, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix F11]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix F10, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F11, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the game machine performance It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix F12]
The gaming machine according to appendix F10 or appendix F11, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, the performance information that is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix F13]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The game machine as set forth in appendix F12, which includes information on the number of unit determinations made by the transfer determination means (41) when the game ball is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F13, since the information related to the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix F14]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix F12, including information relating to a payout rate (base) that is a ratio of a total payout ball number to a game ball payout ball number with respect to a game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F14, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix F15]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix F12, including information related to a continuous character ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F15, the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, and therefore information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix F16]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix F12.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F16, as the performance information that is advantageous information, since the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio, information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix G1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling display contents related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period;
An operation means for receiving an operation by a player;
With
The display control means (51) displays the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) when an operation is performed on the operation means by a player when the specific condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by controlling contents.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, when the player performs an operation on the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled. Therefore, the player can obtain part or all of the profit information by operating the operation means when a specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, in order to display a part or all of the profit information on the profit information display means, the game is improved by actively participating the player.

[Appendix G2]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period, a display area to be controlled by the display control means (51) can be selected from the plurality of display areas by an operation on the operation means. The gaming machine according to appendix G1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can select a display area for displaying any of the plurality of information (partial information of profit information) from the plurality of display areas. Therefore, the player can estimate the profit state by selecting the display area based on his / her own judgment and obtaining a part of the profit information. This makes it possible to obtain different information by selecting a different display area each time a specific condition is satisfied, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix G3]
The gaming machine according to appendix G2, wherein the specific condition is that the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses, and the player's prediction is correct.

[Appendix G4]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Production means (341) in which production is executed in the progress of the game;
Further comprising
The special game includes a plurality of special games having different advantages for the player,
The event is a transition determination until the transition determination result in the transition determination means (41) is shifted to a special game after the transition determination result shifts to a special game. The number of times, and when the result of the transition determination is to shift to a special game, includes at least one of a special game type and an effect type executed in the effect means A gaming machine according to G3.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G3 and Supplementary Note G4, if the player predicts an event that may occur in the future as the game progresses and the player's prediction is correct, the player will change You can enjoy whether or not the predictions are correct in games and jackpot games. In addition, compared to the case where profit information such as information related to game setting values can be passively estimated or recognized as the game progresses, the process of improving profit awareness and recognizing or recognizing profit information. You can enjoy even more.

[Appendix G5]
When the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, the display control is performed by operating the operation means from the plurality of display areas according to the number of the special conditions that are satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G2 to G4, wherein the gaming machine can be selected as a control target by means (51).

[Appendix G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G2 to G5, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G5 and Supplementary Note G6, the number of display areas corresponding to the number of special conditions that are satisfied in a predetermined period can be selected from a plurality of display areas by operating the operation means. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during a predetermined period, two or more pieces of information among the plurality of pieces of information can be obtained by selecting the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times. As a result, two or more pieces of information can be obtained after one predetermined period of time, so that the profit state can be estimated and enjoyed based on a combination of different information.

[Appendix G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G6, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix G7, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is at least a specific condition satisfied after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix G8]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to attachment G7, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G8, in the first gaming state in which the probability that it is determined that the start of the predetermined period is shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix G9]
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G8, wherein:

[Appendix G10]
The gaming machine according to appendix G9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G9 and Supplementary Note G10, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix G11]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix G10, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-added game and the end point of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G11, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end time of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix G12]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G11, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G12, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix G13]
The gaming machine according to appendix G12, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G13, since specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix G14]
Addendum G13, wherein the display control means (51) controls the number of display areas corresponding to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas. The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G14, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix G15]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G11 to G14, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G15, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix G16]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G15, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numerals or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G16, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix G17]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G13 to G16, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G17, since the profit state image capable of recognizing profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the form of the profit state image and the profit state image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix G18]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the shift determination is displayed. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G18, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image that informs or suggests the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix G19]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G18, which is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G19, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix G20]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G19, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G20, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G21]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix G20, which controls display of the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G21, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix G22]
The game according to appendix G18, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G22, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to supplementary note G21, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary for selecting information to be controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix G23]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of G1 to appendix G22.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G23, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix G24]
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix G23, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G24, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to appendix G23 or appendix G24, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one winning slot among the plurality of winning slots (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G25, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player can perform the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix G26]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix G25, comprising information relating to the number of unit determinations made by the transfer determination means (41) when the game ball is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G26, information on the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information, and therefore information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix G27]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix G25, including information relating to a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G27, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix G28]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to appendix G25, wherein the gaming machine includes information relating to a ratio of consecutive actors, which is a ratio of the number of balls to be paid out of a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G28, as the performance information that is the advantageous information, since the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio, the information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix G29]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix G25.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G29, since the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix H1]
A plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) through which prize balls are paid out by entering game balls;
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
A first discharge port (318) for discharging game balls that have not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board;
A second discharge port (373) and a third discharge port (378), which are capable of entering in the special game, and discharge the game ball flowing down the game area to the back side of the game board;
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of times that the detection means (341) detects that a game ball has entered the second discharge port (373) during a predetermined period. Display control means (51) for controlling display contents relating to the profit information;
With
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) in which a game ball can be allowed to enter in the special game,
The game balls that have entered the variable winning opening (316) are distributed to the second discharge port (373), the second discharge port (373), or the third discharge port (378). A gaming machine further comprising sorting means (37).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, whether or not the game balls are inserted into the second discharge port depends on the distribution means A game is provided that depends on the distribution of game balls. Thereby, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the distribution means as to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix H2]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the shift determination by the shift determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The first winning opening (314) can enter a game ball launched into the left area of the game board (31),
The gaming machine according to appendix H1, wherein the variable winning opening (316) is capable of entering a game ball launched into a right region of the game board (31).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H2, since the game ball fired in the left area of the game board can enter the first winning opening, so-called left-handed must be performed in order to receive the determination to shift to the special game There is. On the other hand, since the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can enter the variable winning opening, it is necessary to perform a so-called right strike in the special game. Then, the distribution means can distribute the game ball launched into the right area of the game board to the second discharge port. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate or recognize the profit state in the game for receiving the determination to shift to the special game, while it is possible to estimate or recognize the profit state in the special game. In this way, since the profit state can be estimated or recognized at the time of right-handing such as a special game, it is possible to give motivation to continue the game until the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The game machine according to Supplementary Note H1 or Supplementary Note H2, wherein the second discharge port (373) is harder to enter than the third discharge port (378).

[Appendix H4]
The gaming machine according to appendix H3, wherein the second outlet (373) is provided above the third outlet (378).

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to appendix H3 or appendix H4, wherein the second discharge port (373) has an opening area smaller than that of the third discharge port (378).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H3 to Supplementary Note H5, it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second discharge port as compared to the third discharge port, so it is difficult to satisfy specific conditions and it is easy to estimate or grasp the profit state. is not. Therefore, when the player's profit state is low, for example, when the advantage determination probability is low, the player can easily grasp that the advantage determination probability is low, so that the game at the gaming machine is stopped early. The occurrence of the situation can be suppressed.

[Appendix H6]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix H1 to appendix H5, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix H6, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix H7]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to appendix H6, wherein the gaming machine is set to

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H7, in the first gaming state in which the probability that it is determined that the start of the predetermined period is shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is special gaming. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix H8]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H7, wherein:

[Appendix H9]
The gaming machine according to appendix H8, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. In contrast, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H8 and Supplementary Note H9, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix H10]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix H9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end point of the value-added game and the end point of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H10, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix H11]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H10, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H11, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix H12]
The gaming machine according to appendix H11, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12, specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so that profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix H13]
The display control means (51) controls the number of display areas according to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas as a control object H11 or A gaming machine according to H12.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H13, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H11 to H13, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H14, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix H15]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H13, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numerals or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix H16]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes H11 to H13, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H16, since the profit state image that can recognize the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the form of the profit state image and the profit state image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix H17]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) indicating or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H17, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image informing or suggesting the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix H18]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H17, which is executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H18, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix H19]
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H18, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H19, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H20]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to appendix H19, which controls display of the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H20, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix H21]
The game according to appendix H18, wherein the display control means (51) controls display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H21, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H20, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix H22]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of H1 to Appendix H21.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H22, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance of the ball, it is possible to estimate or recognize the ball performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix H23]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix H22, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H23, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage performance of the gaming machine can be estimated or recognized by being able to estimate or recognize the advantage determination probability. It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix H24]
The gaming machine according to appendix H22 or appendix H23, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note H24, since the performance information that is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player can perform the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix H25]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The game machine as set forth in Appendix H24, which includes information on the number of unit determinations made by the transfer determination means (41) when the game ball is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H25, the information related to the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized because the information related to the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix H26]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix H24, including information relating to a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H26, as the performance information that is advantageous information, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix H27]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to supplementary note H24, comprising information relating to a continuous character ratio, which is a ratio of the number of payout balls to a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H27, as the performance information that is the advantageous information, since the performance information includes information related to the continuous character ratio, the information related to the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix H28]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix H24.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H28, since the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio as performance information that is advantageous information, the information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix I1]
Profit information on the player's profit status as the game progresses (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous feature ratio, feature ratio, expected appearance value, latent probability change, demote to low probability mode Profit information display means (39, 341) capable of displaying
Display control means (51) for controlling the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) in accordance with the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
A staying means (38) for staying the game ball that has passed through the specific area (373) in the predetermined period and releasing the game ball after the predetermined period;
With
The specific condition can be established when a game ball passes through a specific area,
The display control means (51) relates to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means (39, 341) after the elapse of the predetermined period according to the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. A gaming machine characterized by controlling display contents.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, since the specific condition can be established when the specific area passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. Thereby, it can enjoy more about whether a specific condition is satisfy | filled. In addition, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled when the game ball passes through the specific area of the game area. Therefore, even in a situation where a game tends to progress inorganically, it is possible to improve the gameability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area. Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I1, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means after the elapse of a predetermined period is controlled. Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the profit information based on the display contents (a part or all of the profit information) of the profit information display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. Thus, the game can be enjoyed in anticipation of what is displayed on the profit information display means until the predetermined period elapses.

[Appendix I2]
The staying means (38) is a movable member (383) movable between a first position (upper limit position) that restricts the movement of the game ball and a second position (lower limit position) that permits the movement of the game ball. With
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the movable member (383) is at the first position at least at the beginning of the predetermined period and is at the second position at the end of the predetermined period.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I2, it is possible to switch between a state in which the game ball is retained and a state in which the game ball is not retained in the retention means by a simple configuration and control of moving the movable member.

[Appendix I3]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1 or appendix I2, wherein the game ball retained in the retention means (38) is visible.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I3, since the game balls retained in the retention means can be visually recognized, the player can easily grasp the number of game balls retained in the retention means (the number of specific conditions satisfied). . Therefore, for example, if the player confirms that more than the upper limit number of game balls has been retained in the retention means, the profit information display means displays in advance the profit information at the final stage where the profit state can be recognized. I can grasp. Even if game balls that do not reach the upper limit number are retained in the retention means, the profit is displayed based on the display contents (part of profit information) on the profit information display means in consideration of the number of game balls visually recognized. The state can be inferred. As a result, the accuracy of estimating the profit state is increased and the enjoyment of estimating the profit state is also increased, so that the gameability is further improved.

[Appendix I4]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) that give a player a game value,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I1 to appendix I3, wherein a start of the predetermined period is set between a start time of the special game and a start time of the value-added game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I4, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game, is at least a specific condition satisfied after the value-added game is started? Can enjoy.

[Appendix I5]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The start of the predetermined period is a period from the start time of the special game to the start time of the value-added game that is transferred when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. The gaming machine according to appendix I4, characterized by being set to:

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I5, in the first gaming state in which the probability that it is determined that the start of the predetermined period is shifted to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special game. When the game is to be transferred to, it is set between the start time of the special game to be transferred and the start time of the value-added game. That is, the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the so-called first special game and the start time of the value-added game. This guarantees the opportunity to guess or recognize the profit status for each initial hit, because a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit, regardless of whether it is per shot or per consecutive home. .

[Appendix I6]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The special game has a value-added game (open / close execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round game) in which the variable prize opening (316) is opened and closed and a game value is given to the player.
The end of the predetermined period is set from the end of the value-added game until the start of the variable game in which the result of the determination of the transition in the transition determination means (41) is notified after the end of the special game. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note I1 to Supplementary Note I5, wherein:

[Appendix I7]
The gaming machine according to appendix I6, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game.

  By the way, during the period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the jackpot game, the game value is not added and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the jackpot game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note I6 and Supplementary Note I7, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game and the end of the jackpot game, so that a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. If it is, the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means using the blank period for the player. This makes it possible to display profit information on the profit information display means in a time-efficient manner in the special game.

[Appendix I8]
The special gaming state is a first special gaming state (low probability mode) in which the transition determination means (41) notifies the result of the transition determination after the special gaming state ends. 5R normal jackpot gaming state) and after the end of the special gaming state, the transition determining means (41) has a higher probability of determining to shift to the special gaming state than the first gaming state, and the transition determination A second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state) transferred to the second gaming state (high probability mode) in which the result is notified,
The gaming machine according to appendix I7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set between the end time of the value-added game and the end time of the special game in the first special game state.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I8, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-added game in the first special game state and the end of the special game. Therefore, when the result of the determination of the transition to the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, per shot that the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, The predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game and the end of the special game. On the other hand, when the result of the determination of the transition of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, per consecutive resort where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state If the result of the determination of the transition of the second gaming state is to be shifted to the first special gaming state without ending the predetermined period from the end of the value-added game to the end of the special game, The predetermined period is ended from the end point of the value-added game in the first special game state to the end point of the special game. In other words, for each consecutive resort where the first win is transferred to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends between the end of the value-added game in the first special game where the consecutive resort ends and the end of the special game. Is done. Therefore, since the predetermined period is set over the first special game at the end of the extended period, the predetermined period is longer than that per single shot, and the predetermined period is increased as the number of times of transition to the second special game state increases. The period will be longer. As a result, it is more likely that the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher per consecutive home than that per single shot, and the number of times satisfying a specific condition will be higher as the number of consecutive homes increases. Become. Thereby, the player can obtain the benefit that not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases, but also the profit state can be easily estimated or recognized as the number of consecutive games increases.

[Appendix I9]
The profit information includes a plurality of information necessary for recognizing the profit information,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I1 to appendix I8, wherein the profit information display means (39, 341) includes a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of pieces of information.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I9, the profit information includes a plurality of information, and the profit information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of information. Therefore, it becomes possible to individually display a plurality of pieces of information necessary for recognizing profit information in any of a plurality of display areas. Thereby, since the game nature which can adjust the difficulty which presumes profit information by which information of a plurality of information is displayed can be provided, the interest of a game is improved.

[Appendix I10]
The gaming machine according to attachment I9, wherein specific information having a correspondence relationship among the plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I10, specific information in a correspondence relationship among a plurality of pieces of information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, so that profit information can be estimated based on the correspondence relationship. . Thereby, when a specific condition is satisfied, the player can enjoy guessing profit information while looking forward to which information of a plurality of information is displayed.

[Appendix I11]
The display control means (51) controls the number of display areas according to the number of times of the special condition satisfied in the predetermined period among the plurality of display areas as the control object I9 or The gaming machine according to appendix I10.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I11, the display content related to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means is controlled according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the profit state according to the contents displayed on the profit information display means until the specific condition of the upper limit number is satisfied in the predetermined period, and the specific condition is the upper limit number. You can also enjoy whether or not it is satisfied. As described above, the profitability can be estimated, so that the gameability is improved, and the player can be motivated to continue the game.

[Appendix I12]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I9 to I11, wherein the profit information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting areas as the plurality of display areas.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I12, the profit information display means has a plurality of light emitting areas. Such profit information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip profit information display means for displaying profit information while suppressing an increase in the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and an increase in manufacturing cost.

[Appendix I13]
The gaming machine according to appendix I12, wherein the profit information display means (39) is capable of displaying numbers or alphabets by controlling lighting or extinguishing of the plurality of light emitting areas.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I13, since the profit information display means can display numbers or alphabets, the profit information can be displayed in correspondence with the numbers or alphabets. This makes it easy to guess or recognize profit information because some or all of the profit information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, and simplifies the process of estimating profit information without requiring advanced knowledge. Can enjoy.

[Appendix I14]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I9 to I11, wherein the profit information display means (341) is capable of displaying a profit state image that suggests or clearly indicates the profit state.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I14, since the profit status image that can recognize the profit information can be displayed on the profit information display means, there are many process options until the mode of the profit status image and the profit status image are displayed. Therefore, the profit state can be estimated or recognized in various patterns according to the form of the profit state image and the process until the profit state image is displayed. Thereby, the game property with respect to estimating or recognizing a profit state is improved.

[Appendix I15]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
The profit information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a decorative symbol (main symbol) indicating or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine described in 1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I15, the profit state image is displayed on the image display means capable of displaying the decorative display variation display image that informs or suggests the result of the shift determination. Therefore, when displaying a variable display image on the image display means in a gaming machine, the profit state image can be displayed using the image display means. Accordingly, since the profit state image is displayed using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing a display means for displaying the profit state image, it is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix I16]
When the specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times during the predetermined period, the display control means (51) controls the display of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition is satisfied among the plurality of information. The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes I1 to I15, wherein the game machines are executed in a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I16, when a specific condition is satisfied a plurality of times in a predetermined period, display control of the number of information according to the number of times the specific condition of the plurality of information is satisfied is performed in a predetermined order. Executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy by guessing the profit state based on the number and order of display of the plurality of pieces of information to be controlled.

[Appendix I17]
The gaming machine according to Appendix I16, wherein the predetermined order is a predetermined order.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I17, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of a plurality of information is controlled according to a predetermined order. Here, each of the plurality of pieces of information may differ in the degree (importance) with which the profit state can be estimated. In this case, the predetermined order can be arbitrarily set to an order in which it is easy to guess or recognize the profit state or an order in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state. Therefore, by defining the order in which the display of a plurality of pieces of information is controlled, it is possible to give a game that can adjust the difficulty of guessing profit information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I18]
The display control means (51) is in accordance with an order defined by an order pattern selected from a plurality of order patterns that define the predetermined order in accordance with the number of times of the specific condition satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to attachment I17, wherein display of the plurality of pieces of information is controlled.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I18, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display of a plurality of information is controlled according to the order of the control target patterns selected from the plurality of order patterns. Here, as the plurality of order patterns, it is possible to arbitrarily set a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easily estimated or recognized and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize. For this reason, for example, it is difficult to guess or recognize the profit state, and it is possible to prevent the profit state from being easily estimated or recognized by setting a large number of order patterns or to be easily selected. It is possible to prevent the game at the gaming machine being played from being stopped. Moreover, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the profit state by mixing a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is easy to guess or recognize and a plurality of order patterns in which the profit state is difficult to guess or recognize.

[Appendix I9]
The game according to appendix I16, wherein the display control means (51) controls the display of information selected by lottery from the plurality of information when the specific condition is satisfied during the predetermined period. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I19, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, display of information selected by lottery from a plurality of information, that is, information selected at random from the plurality of information is controlled. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the profit state from being estimated or recognized from the order in which the display of a plurality of information is controlled. Further, unlike the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I18, it is not necessary to set an order pattern and store the order pattern, and the control necessary to select the information whose display is controlled among a plurality of pieces of information is simple. It becomes.

[Appendix I20]
The profit information is performance information (game setting value, number of lottery per unit jackpot, base, continuous character ratio, character ratio, expected value of ball, etc.) serving as an index indicating the ball performance The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to Appendix I19.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I20, since the profit information is performance information that serves as an index indicating the performance, it is possible to estimate or recognize the performance of the gaming machine as the profit state. In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the performance of the ball, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance to be recognized, and whether to continue the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the ball performance. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix I21]
Transition determination means for performing a transition determination (a jackpot lottery) on whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition ( 41),
Advantage determination probability setting means (41) capable of setting an advantage determination probability determined to shift to the special gaming state in the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) from a plurality of mutually different advantage determination probabilities. In addition,
The gaming machine according to appendix I20, wherein the performance information includes information (game setting value) relating to the advantage determination probability set by the advantage determination probability setting means (41).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I21, since the profit information includes information on the advantage determination probability that greatly affects the game performance of the gaming machine, the advantage determination probability can be estimated or recognized, so that the game machine performance It is possible to estimate or recognize the ball-out performance based on the index more appropriately reflected. In this way, the player enjoys guessing the advantage determination probability and enjoys the game while expecting the advantage determination probability to be recognizable, and whether to continue the game based on the advantage determination probability estimation or recognition result. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix I22]
The gaming machine according to appendix I20 or appendix I21, wherein the performance information includes information indicating a payout performance based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I22, since the performance information which is advantageous information includes information indicating the performance of the ball based on at least one of the plurality of winning ports, the player can perform the ball performance based on the winning port. Can be estimated or recognized. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the ball performance reflecting the variation in the winning performance with respect to the winning mouth between the gaming machines due to, for example, individual differences during manufacturing of the gaming machine or aging. As a result, the player enjoys guessing and playing the ball performance based on the winning mouth, enjoying the game while expecting the ball performance based on the winning mouth to be recognizable, and estimating the ball performance based on the winning mouth. Alternatively, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the game based on the recognition result.

[Appendix I23]
The plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) include a first winning port (314) that gives an opportunity to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering a game ball,
The performance information is sent to the first winning opening (314) until the number of balls reaches a minus of a predetermined number of balls, or until the number of balls thrown on the game board (31) reaches a specific number of balls. The gaming machine according to appendix I22, comprising information relating to the number of unit determinations made by the transfer determination means (41) when the game ball is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I23, information on the number of unit determinations is included as performance information that is advantageous information, and therefore information on the number of unit determinations can be estimated or recognized. Here, the number of unit determinations is triggered by the game ball entering the first prize opening until the difference ball number reaches the minus of the predetermined ball number or the game ball shot ball number reaches the specific ball number. This is the number of times that the transition determination is made. That is, the number of unit determinations is an index indicating the ease of transition determination in a normal gaming state (a state with a low probability mode and not a short time mode). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize information related to the number of unit determinations, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of the transition determination in the normal gaming state. Thereby, the player enjoys guessing the number of unit judgments, enjoys the game while expecting the unit judgment number to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the unit judgment number. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix I24]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) cause a predetermined number of game balls to be paid out based on the game balls entered, and performs the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game balls. A first winning opening (314) for giving an opportunity, and a general winning opening (313) having a function different from that of the first winning opening, with a specific number of gaming balls being paid out based on the entering of gaming balls. Including
The performance information includes the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of game balls to be entered into the first winning port (314) and the number of general balls (313) with respect to the number of balls to be played on the game board (31). The gaming machine according to appendix I22, comprising information relating to a payout rate (base), which is a ratio of the total payout ball number to the payout ball number of the game ball with respect to the game ball entering the game.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I24, since the performance information includes information related to the payout rate as performance information that is advantageous information, information related to the payout rate can be estimated or recognized. Here, the payout rate is the ratio of the total number of payout balls of the first winning port and the general winning port to the number of shot balls. In other words, the payout rate is an index indicating the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information regarding the payout rate, thereby estimating or recognizing the ease of winning in the first winning opening and the general winning opening. As a result, the player enjoys guessing the appearance rate, enjoys the game while expecting the appearance rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the appearance rate. It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

[Appendix I25]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a variable winning hole (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special gaming state,
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note I22, comprising information related to a ratio of consecutive actors, which is a ratio occupied by the number of balls to be paid out of a ball.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I25, as the performance information which is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information on the continuous character ratio, so that the information on the continuous character ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, the consecutive character ratio is the payout of game balls to the variable winning opening in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to multiple winning openings. This is the ratio of the number of balls. In other words, the ratio of consecutive characters is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to a special game (the ratio of staying in a special game state), and the ease of winning a prize in a variable prize opening (the play in special game state) Rate). Therefore, the player can guess or recognize the information about the ratio of the consecutive characters, so that the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the variable prize opening. It becomes possible to guess or recognize the ease of winning a prize. Thereby, the player enjoys the game by guessing the continuous character ratio, expects the continuous character ratio to be recognizable, and plays the game based on the estimation or recognition result of the continuous character ratio. It is possible to determine whether or not to continue.

[Appendix I26]
The plurality of winning holes (313 to 316) include a first winning hole (314) that gives an opportunity to make the shift determination by the shift determining means (41) by entering a game ball, and a game by support of an electric accessory. A second winning port (315) that allows a ball to enter and a trigger for performing the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) by entering the game ball, and the entrance of the game ball in the special gaming state Possible variable prize opening (316),
The performance information is the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the game balls entering the plurality of payout ports (313 to 316). It includes information relating to an accessory ratio, which is a ratio of the total number of payout balls to the number of payout balls for the ball entering and the number of payout balls for the game ball entering the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix I22.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note I26, as the performance information that is the advantageous information, the performance information includes information related to the accessory ratio, so that information related to the accessory ratio can be estimated or recognized. Here, in the total number of payout balls, which is the total number of payout balls of game balls with respect to the entrance of game balls to a plurality of payout ports, This is the ratio of the number of payout balls to the incoming ball. In other words, the ratio of the bonuses is the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), the support game state receiving the support of the electric game (short-time game state), and the stay ratio. This is an index indicating the ease of winning a prize in the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the payout rate in a special gaming state). Therefore, the player can estimate or recognize the information related to the ratio of the actors, so that the frequency at which the result of the transition determination is shifted to the special game (the special game state stay ratio), and the support of the electric actor It becomes possible to estimate or recognize the stay ratio of the received support gaming state (short-time gaming state) and the ease of winning a prize to the variable winning opening and the second winning opening (the rate of playing in the special gaming state). In this way, whether the player enjoys the game by guessing the bonus rate, expects the bonus rate to be recognizable, and continues the game based on the guess or recognition result of the bonus rate It becomes possible to determine whether or not.

10: Game machine 313: General winning port 314: First winning port 315: Second winning port 316: Variable winning port 341: Symbol display unit 37: Clune device 37
373: Special out ball outlet 38: Game ball retention part 391: Retention lane 393: Stopper part 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display part 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
47: ROM
5: Audio lamp control device 51: MPU
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

A transition determination means for performing a transition determination as to whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Profit information display means capable of displaying profit information related to the player's profit status during the progress of the game;
Display control means for controlling display contents relating to the profit information displayed on the profit information display means according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period;
With
The special game has a value-added game including a plurality of unit games that give a player a game value,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-added game.

Images